WO2023083017A1 - Signal angle-of-arrival estimation method and related device - Google Patents

Signal angle-of-arrival estimation method and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023083017A1
WO2023083017A1 PCT/CN2022/128077 CN2022128077W WO2023083017A1 WO 2023083017 A1 WO2023083017 A1 WO 2023083017A1 CN 2022128077 W CN2022128077 W CN 2022128077W WO 2023083017 A1 WO2023083017 A1 WO 2023083017A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
antenna
arrival
electronic device
phase difference
angle
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/128077
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张志华
龙星宇
李建铭
黄建仁
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023083017A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023083017A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S3/00Direction-finders for determining the direction from which infrasonic, sonic, ultrasonic, or electromagnetic waves, or particle emission, not having a directional significance, are being received
    • G01S3/02Direction-finders for determining the direction from which infrasonic, sonic, ultrasonic, or electromagnetic waves, or particle emission, not having a directional significance, are being received using radio waves
    • G01S3/14Systems for determining direction or deviation from predetermined direction
    • G01S3/46Systems for determining direction or deviation from predetermined direction using antennas spaced apart and measuring phase or time difference between signals therefrom, i.e. path-difference systems
    • G01S3/48Systems for determining direction or deviation from predetermined direction using antennas spaced apart and measuring phase or time difference between signals therefrom, i.e. path-difference systems the waves arriving at the antennas being continuous or intermittent and the phase difference of signals derived therefrom being measured

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal and related equipment.
  • Positioning algorithms based on signal angle of arrival (AOA) are often used in electronic device positioning technology.
  • the electronic device obtains the angle of arrival of the signal between the electronic device to be positioned and the straight line where the multiple antennas are located according to the phase difference of the signals collected by the multiple antennas.
  • the position of the electronic device to be positioned is determined according to the angle of arrival of signals between the electronic device to be positioned and different straight lines.
  • the hardware performance of the electronic device is not in an ideal state, it often occurs that the phase difference between the antennas measured by the electronic device when receiving the same wireless signal corresponds to multiple arrival angles; when determining the arrival angle of the direction of arrival based on the calculated phase difference, The true angle of arrival cannot be determined, leading to serious errors in the estimation of the signal angle of arrival. In this way, the accuracy of the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device through the phase difference between the antennas is not high.
  • the present application provides a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival and related equipment, through which an electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of a radio signal received by the electronic device.
  • the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal, the method is applied to an electronic device, the electronic device includes an antenna unit, the antenna unit includes a first antenna and a second antenna, and the antenna unit has multiple An antenna pattern state, the method includes:
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device receives the same arrival signal through the first antenna and the second antenna and calculating the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states;
  • the electronic device determines the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences.
  • the method provided in this application can switch between multiple pattern states to obtain at least two phases corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states difference, and based on the at least two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern states, the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be uniquely determined, and the angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be determined by the phase difference of at least two antenna pattern states to improve the angle of arrival accuracy.
  • the multiple antenna pattern states in the present application there may be two or more than two.
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
  • the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
  • the electronic device determines a first set of arrival angles according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and a preset mapping relationship table, wherein the mapping relationship table includes multiple antenna pattern states different angles of arrival, and phase differences between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
  • the electronic device switches the antenna unit from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states state, and receiving said radio signal by said first antenna and said second antenna in said second antenna pattern state;
  • the electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
  • each antenna pattern state After obtaining the phase difference in each antenna pattern state, first determine the number of arrival angles corresponding to the phase angle according to the preset mapping relationship table and the phase difference. If the number of arrival angles corresponding to the phase difference is greater than 1, switch The antenna pattern state and obtain the phase difference corresponding to the corresponding antenna pattern state; if the phase difference corresponds to only one angle of arrival, then the angle of arrival is the actual angle of arrival.
  • the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the second phase difference and the second antenna pattern The state and the mapping relationship table determine a second set of arrival angles;
  • the electronic device determines an angle of arrival of the radio signal based on the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
  • the corresponding arrival angle set is determined according to the phase difference, the antenna pattern state corresponding to the phase difference, and the mapping relationship table, wherein the arrival angle set includes at least one arrival angle, and the two arrival angles corresponding to the two antenna pattern states
  • the set determines the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal.
  • determining, by the electronic device, the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival includes:
  • intersection If the intersection includes an angle of arrival, then determine the angle of arrival as the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  • the actual angle of arrival is determined by obtaining the intersection of the two angles of arrival.
  • the method further includes:
  • the electronic device switches the antenna unit from the second antenna pattern state to a third antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and through the first antenna and the second antenna receiving said radio signal in said third antenna pattern state;
  • the electronic device determines a third angle-of-arrival set according to the third phase difference, the third antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
  • the angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined from the intersection and the third set of angles of arrival.
  • angle of arrival determined by the two pattern states is greater than two, control the antenna unit to switch the antenna pattern state and obtain the corresponding arrival angle set under the antenna pattern state, and determine the actual angle of arrival according to the intersection of all obtained angles of arrival. angle of arrival.
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to sequentially switch between different antenna pattern states in at least two antenna pattern states; during the switching process, the electronic device passes through the first antenna pattern state in each antenna pattern state An antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in each antenna pattern state, so as to obtain all antenna fields of the antenna unit A type state corresponds to at least two phase differences of the first antenna and the second antenna.
  • the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: according to each antenna pattern state of the first antenna and the second antenna The phase difference and the preset mapping relationship table determine the corresponding arrival angle set, so as to obtain at least two arrival angle sets corresponding to the at least two antenna pattern states, and the mapping relationship table includes a plurality of antenna pattern states different angles of arrival in the state, and the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
  • the angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined based on at least two of the sets of angles of arrival.
  • the set of angles of arrival corresponding to the phase difference can be determined through the mapping relationship table and the obtained phase difference, and the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be determined according to the multiple sets of angles of arrival.
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
  • the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
  • the electronic device inputs the identification of the first antenna pattern state and the first phase difference into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function, and if the angle-of-arrival calculation function outputs at least two angles of arrival, the electronic device will
  • the antenna unit is switched from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and the second antenna pattern state is switched between the first antenna and the second antenna receiving the radio signal in an antenna pattern state;
  • the electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
  • the corresponding arrival angle set is determined according to the phase difference, the antenna pattern state corresponding to the phase difference, and the preset angle-of-arrival calculation function, wherein the arrival angle set includes at least one angle-of-arrival, through the two corresponding antenna pattern states
  • the two angle-of-arrival sets determine the actual angle-of-arrival of the radio signal.
  • determining, by the electronic device, the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes:
  • the at least two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern states are input into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function to obtain the angle-of-arrival of the radio signal.
  • the angle of arrival of the radio signal is obtained by using at least two phase differences, corresponding antenna pattern states, and a preset angle of arrival calculation function.
  • the first antenna has at least two first feed points
  • the electronic device controlling the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
  • the electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  • the antenna pattern can be switched between the antenna pattern states by changing the feed point of the antenna.
  • the first antenna has at least two first ground points
  • the electronic device controlling the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
  • the electronic device controls switching of different grounding points among at least two first grounding points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  • the switching of the antenna pattern state is realized by changing the ground point of the antenna. That is, only changing the feed point of one of the multiple antennas can realize the switching of the antenna pattern state.
  • the first antenna has at least two first feed points
  • the second antenna includes at least two second feed points
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to Switching between the two antenna pattern states includes:
  • the electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source and at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source Switching between different feed points in the antenna unit, so as to realize the switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  • the switching of the antenna pattern state is realized by changing the feeding points of all the antennas.
  • two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna or two feed points of the at least two first feed points The points are respectively located on adjacent two sides of the first antenna.
  • the angle between the feed point on both sides of the antenna and the line connecting the antenna center, the angle between the feed point on the adjacent two sides and the antenna center, and the angle change angle correspond to the antenna pattern state.
  • the phase change is also more obvious, and it is convenient to determine the change of the phase difference according to the phase change, so that the angle of arrival can be determined more accurately.
  • the included angle between the feed points on both sides of the antenna and the antenna center may be 180 degrees, and the included angle between the feed points on adjacent two sides and the antenna center may be 90 degrees.
  • two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna, and two feed points of the at least two second feed points The points are respectively located on opposite sides of the second antenna, or the two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on adjacent sides of the first antenna, and the at least two second feed points The two feed points in the points are respectively located on adjacent two sides of the second antenna.
  • the antenna unit further includes a third antenna
  • the mapping relationship table further includes different angles of arrival under multiple antenna pattern states, and all angles of arrival corresponding to different angles of arrival of the radio signal. phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna.
  • the number of antennas of the antenna unit may be 3, 4 or 5, and the application does not limit the number of antennas.
  • receiving radio signals by the electronic device through the first antenna and the second antenna includes:
  • the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna; the electronic device calculates that the first antenna and the second antenna are in the field of the first antenna
  • the first phase difference in the type state including:
  • the electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival set according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table, including:
  • the electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival subset according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
  • the electronic device determines a second angle-of-arrival subset according to the third phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
  • a first set of angles of arrival is determined according to the first subset of angles of arrival and the second subset of angles of arrival.
  • the first antenna has at least two first feed points
  • the second antenna has at least two second feed points
  • the third antenna has at least two third feed points
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states, including:
  • the electronic device controls the switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, and the switching between the at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source.
  • an electronic device which may include two or more than two antennas, a display screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories; one or more processors and two or more Two antennas, one or more memories and a display screen are coupled, one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device performs the above-mentioned A method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal in any possible manner of the first aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, when the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the signal arrival angle in any possible implementation of any one of the above aspects Estimation method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute the method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal in any possible implementation manner of any one of the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a model for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal using a phase difference provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of antenna placement in an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device receiving a signal provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for establishing a mapping relationship table by a mobile phone provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application in the first antenna pattern state;
  • 5B is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application in the second antenna pattern state;
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the first antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • 7B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the second antenna under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the first antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the third antenna under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of changing the feeding point of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11A is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 11B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • 12A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • 12B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • 13B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 14C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram of the distribution of confusion angles under the single-antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram of the distribution of confusion angles under the dual-antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a software framework of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • the angle of arrival may refer to the angle formed between the signal transmitted by the signal transmitting device and the antenna in the electronic device, which is called the angle of arrival, and may also be called the angle of incidence.
  • the angle ⁇ formed by the radio signal and antenna 1 and antenna 2 is the arrival angle of the radio signal.
  • the signal transmitting device may be a router, a base station, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the radio signal may be a cellular mobile signal, a Bluetooth signal, a Wi-Fi (wireless fidelity, wireless fidelity) signal, a UWB (Ultra-wideband, ultra-wideband) signal, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the angle of arrival of the signal may also be referred to as the direction of arrival of the signal.
  • the antenna pattern refers to the variation of the relative field strength (normalized modulus) of the radiation field with the direction at a certain distance from the antenna.
  • the antenna pattern is usually described by the antenna radiation pattern.
  • the antenna radiation pattern is also called the antenna pattern and the far field pattern.
  • the antenna radiation pattern is used to characterize the antenna radiation characteristics (field strength amplitude, phase, polarization) and space angle Graphics of relationships. Different antenna patterns correspond to different antenna pattern states, and the relative field strengths of the radiation fields of antennas in different antenna pattern states vary with directions.
  • the electronic device may have a positioning function.
  • a positioning function in an electronic device (for example, clicks on a map application)
  • the electronic device can obtain a positioning result through an AOA positioning algorithm.
  • the electronic device may be a smart device with two or more antennas, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, and a personal computer, and the specific type of the electronic device is not particularly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device may also have an object finding function or a function of determining the direction of other devices.
  • the electronic device may determine the direction of the object it is looking for through the AOA estimation, or determine the direction of other electronic devices through the AOA estimation, which is not limited herein.
  • the electronic device may store a mapping relationship table between phase differences between antennas and signal arrival angles.
  • the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal
  • the electronic device can determine the phase difference between the antennas when the signal is received. Then, the electronic device matches the phase difference with the phase difference in the mapping relationship table, and the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference matched with the phase difference in the mapping relationship table is the estimated result of the angle of arrival.
  • the electronic device may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between antennas and the signal arrival angle of a specific antenna pattern state.
  • the electronic device can establish the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3.
  • Table 1 is a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between antennas in the electronic device and the angle of arrival of the received signal.
  • Table 1 shows the phase difference PD1 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when the angle of arrival of the signal is 0° to 359° respectively.
  • the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (0°)
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 receive The phase difference PD2 to this signal is B(0°).
  • the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (1°), and the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B(1°).
  • the angle of arrival of the signal received by the electronic device is 2°
  • the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (2°)
  • the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B(2°).
  • the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (359°)
  • the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B (359°).
  • Table 2 is a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the received signal of the electronic device in one antenna pattern state.
  • the actual arrival angle of the signal is 210°
  • the phase difference corresponding to this arrival angle is 1.2°.
  • the phase difference of 1.2° corresponds to three arrival angles: 210°, 150° and 60°. In this way, when the signal When the real angle of arrival is 210°, the electronic device may estimate the angle of arrival to be 150° or 60° according to the phase difference.
  • the electronic device only determines the angle of arrival of the signal through the phase difference between the antennas and the image relationship between the phase difference and the angle of arrival. It may appear that the same phase difference value corresponds to multiple angles of arrival. In this way, the angle of arrival estimated by the electronic device may be inaccurate.
  • Table 3 is a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the received signal of the electronic device in two antenna pattern states.
  • each antenna pattern state has the same phase difference corresponding to multiple arrival angles
  • the first antenna pattern state has a phase difference of 1.2° corresponding to three arrival angles: 60°, 150° and 210°
  • the second The phase difference of 2.7° in the antenna pattern state corresponds to three arrival angles: 100°, 210° and 350°; if the calculated phase difference (PD1) between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is 1.2° in the first antenna pattern state , the phase difference (PD1) between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is calculated to be 2.7° under the second antenna pattern state, and the real The angle of arrival is 210°.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of the signal, which may include: the electronic device has an antenna unit, and the antenna unit includes at least two antennas, and the electronic device passes The antenna receives radio signals, and the electronic device stores a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas in the antenna unit and the signal arrival angle under the antenna field state set.
  • the antenna field state set includes at least two antenna field states; the electronic device is in When receiving the radio signal, determine that the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state, determine the first phase difference of the antenna unit in the first antenna pattern state, and obtain the phase difference between the antennas in the first antenna pattern state and the signal arrival angle
  • the first mapping relationship table matching the first phase difference and the first mapping relationship table, determining a first signal arrival angle set corresponding to the first phase difference, the first signal arrival angle set includes at least two signal arrival angles; the antenna unit Switch from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state, determine the second phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit in the second antenna pattern state, and obtain the phase difference between the antennas and the second antenna pattern state.
  • the second mapping relationship table of the signal arrival angle matches the second phase difference and the second mapping relationship table to determine the second arrival angle set corresponding to the second phase difference; since the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state The real angle of arrival of the received signal in the state remains unchanged, and the angle of arrival at which the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles overlap is the real angle of arrival.
  • the electronic device is also used to switch the antenna unit from the second antenna pattern state to the third antenna pattern state, and loop In the above steps, until the number of arrival angles that coincide with the multiple arrival angle sets is one.
  • the mapping relationship between the phase difference and the angle of arrival stored in the electronic device may be one, that is, the phase difference corresponding to all the antenna pattern states under the antenna pattern state set and the angle of arrival are located in the same mapping relationship table;
  • the mapping relationship table between the phase difference and the angle of arrival under the antenna pattern state stored in the electronic device can be multiple, that is, each antenna under the antenna pattern state set The phase difference and arrival angle corresponding to the field state are located in a mapping relationship table.
  • the antenna unit of the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may have two antennas, or three antennas, or four antennas, or more antennas, which is not limited here.
  • the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking an electronic device having three antennas as an example.
  • FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an electronic device with 3 antennas.
  • the electronic device 100 in FIG. 2 may have three antennas: antenna 1 , antenna 2 and antenna 3 . It can be understood that, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the placement position of the antenna in the electronic device, and the specific shape, type, and the like of the antenna.
  • the antenna unit of the electronic device When the angle of arrival of the wireless signal is fixed, the antenna unit of the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, the relative field strength of the radiation field of the antenna unit varies with the direction, and the phase difference between the antennas corresponding to the angle of arrival is also different. That is, the phase difference between the antennas can be changed by switching the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit.
  • the electronic device can use the phase difference of different antenna pattern states to estimate the angle of arrival of the signal. In this way, the accuracy of AOA estimation can be improved.
  • the electronic device may store a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit under the set of antenna pattern states and the angle of arrival of the signal.
  • the signal transmitter 300 can transmit signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200 .
  • the mobile phone 200 can record the phase difference between the antennas when receiving signals from different directions of arrival.
  • FIG. 4 which exemplarily shows the specific process of the mobile phone 200 establishing a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the signal under the set of antenna pattern states.
  • the signal transmitter 300 is placed in different directions of the mobile phone 200 to continuously transmit radio signals.
  • the mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal sent by the signal transmitter 300 through the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , and the antenna 3 .
  • the signal transmitter 300 can be placed in different directions of the mobile phone 200 to continuously transmit radio signals.
  • the mobile phone 200 can receive the radio signal sent by the signal transmitter 300 through the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 and the antenna 3 .
  • the mobile phone 200 calculates and stores the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2, the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3, and the corresponding arrival angle ⁇ of the radio signal under the current antenna pattern state .
  • the mobile phone 200 first determines the current antenna pattern state. Under the current antenna pattern state, when the signal transmitter 300 is placed in the 0° direction of the mobile phone 200, the mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal transmitted by the signal transmitter 300.
  • the mobile phone 200 can calculate the phase difference PD1 (0°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 (0°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when receiving the radio signal in the 0° direction.
  • the mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal transmitted by the signal transmitter 300 .
  • the mobile phone 200 can calculate the phase difference PD1 (1°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 (1°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when receiving the radio signal in the 1° direction.
  • the signal transmitter 300 transmits radio signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200 .
  • the signal transmitter 300 adjusts 1° each time.
  • the signal transmitter 200 transmits the angle of
  • the adjustment size can be 0.1°, 0.5°, etc., that is, the adjustment size of the emission angle can be determined according to the actual scene, and there is no special limitation here.
  • the signal transmitter 300 may transmit radio signals on the same plane as the mobile phone 200 .
  • the signal transmitter 300 transmits radio signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200, the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are still in the same plane.
  • the arrival angle of the radio signal may be an included angle between planes. It can be understood that the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 may be on different planes.
  • the angle of arrival of the radio signal may be a spatial angle, that is, the spatial angle may include an azimuth, a pitch, and a roll formed between the radio signal and the antenna in the mobile phone 200 .
  • S404 Determine whether the mobile phone 200 has received radio signals from all directions, and store the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 corresponding to all directions of incoming waves.
  • the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 on the same plane as an example.
  • the signal transmitter 300 can take the mobile phone 200 as the center, and continuously transmit radio signals at intervals of a preset angle ⁇ on a circle with a preset distance from the mobile phone 200 .
  • the preset angle ⁇ may be 1°, 2°, or 5°, and the preset angle ⁇ is not limited here.
  • the mobile phone 200 establishes and stores the current antenna pattern state, a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  • the mobile phone 200 After the mobile phone 200 stores the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 corresponding to all incoming wave directions, the mobile phone 200 can establish the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, the phase difference between the antennas and the radio The mapping relationship table of the angle of arrival of the signal.
  • the mapping relationship table can record the phase difference PD1 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2, and the phase difference between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are on the same plane, and the arrival angle of the radio signal is separated by a preset angle ⁇ . PD2.
  • the mapping relationship table can also record that the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are not on the same plane, and when the angle of arrival of the radio signal is separated by a preset angle ⁇ , the corresponding phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2, and the phase between antenna 1 and antenna 3 Poor PD2.
  • step S407 is executed.
  • the mobile phone 200 matches all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set to establish a corresponding mapping relationship table, if the mapping relationship table corresponding to at least one antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set has not been established, or has been established If there is no at least one antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set in the mapping relationship table, it means that the phase difference and angle of arrival between the antennas in the at least one antenna pattern state have not been measured and calculated, and the mobile phone can be switched to One of the antenna pattern states, and repeatedly execute steps S401 to S405 to complete the measurement or calculation of the phase difference and the angle of arrival under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
  • the above steps are cyclically executed until the mapping relationship tables corresponding to all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set are established and stored in the mobile phone.
  • the antenna pattern state set includes a first antenna pattern state and a second antenna pattern state, and in the first antenna pattern state established by the mobile phone 200, the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal
  • the table may be shown in Table 4 below.
  • this table 4 records the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3 when the radio signal has a total of 360 angles from 0 ° to 359 ° under the first antenna pattern state.
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E (0°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(0°).
  • the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 1°
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E(1°);
  • the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(1°).
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E(2°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(2°).
  • the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 359°
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E (359°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F (359°).
  • mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal established by the mobile phone 200 in the second antenna pattern state may be shown in Table 5 below.
  • this table 5 records the phase difference PD3 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 when the radio signal has a total of 360 angles from 0° to 359° under the second antenna pattern state, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3 The phase difference PD4.
  • the phase difference PD3 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G(0°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H(0°).
  • the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 1°
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G (1°
  • the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H (1°).
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G(2°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H(2°).
  • the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 359°
  • the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G (359°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H (359°).
  • mapping relationship tables stored in the mobile phone 200 may not be limited to the mapping relationship tables shown in Table 4 and the mapping relationship tables shown in Table 5.
  • the mapping relationship table between the field state, the angle of arrival and the phase difference between the antennas of the mobile phone 200 may also be stored in the mobile phone 200 . This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the mobile phone 200 may simultaneously store the mapping relationship table corresponding to the first antenna pattern state and the mapping relationship table corresponding to the second antenna pattern state in one table.
  • the above Table 4 and Table 5 can be stored in the same table. It is not limited here.
  • the mobile phone 200 may store the mapping relationship table corresponding to the antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set established by the mobile phone 200 in the cloud server or server, which is not limited here.
  • the mobile phone 200 may have two antennas, namely antenna 1 and antenna 2 .
  • the mobile phone 200 may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
  • the mobile phone 200 may have four antennas including antenna 1 , antenna 2 , antenna 3 and antenna 4 .
  • the mobile phone 200 can store the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 2, the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 4 under the antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set. , and the mapping relationship table between the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  • the image relationship table can store the different arrival angles of radio signals under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set, the corresponding phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 2, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3. , and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 4.
  • the mobile phone 200 may have more than N antennas, and N is greater than 4.
  • the mobile phone 200 may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between any antenna of the N antennas and other antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
  • the mapping relationship table may store different arrival angles of radio signals, and corresponding phase differences between any one of the N antennas and other antennas.
  • the mobile phone 200 when the mobile phone 200 establishes the mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under the antenna pattern state set in the antenna pattern state set, the mobile phone 200 can be in a fixed position, and can be changed by changing
  • the position of the signal transmitter 300 is used to change the angle at which the radio signal emitted by the signal transmitter 300 reaches the antenna in the mobile phone 200 .
  • the signal transmitter 300 can also be in a fixed position, and the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the antenna in the mobile phone 200 can be changed by changing the position of the mobile phone 200 .
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the antenna pattern is used to represent the relative field strength of the radiation field of the antenna changing with the direction.
  • the antenna unit of the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, and the relative field strength of the radiation field corresponding to the antenna changes with the direction.
  • the phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit changes accordingly.
  • the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit can be changed through the antenna modulation technology, which includes changing the feed point and ground point of the antenna unit, etc., so as to realize the switching of different antenna pattern states.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are schematic diagrams illustrating switching between two antenna pattern states of an antenna unit of an electronic device.
  • the electronic device 600 shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B has an antenna unit 610, and the antenna unit 610 has three antennas: a first antenna 612, a second antenna 614 and a third antenna 616, and the first antenna 612 has a first feed point 612A and The second feed point 612B, the first feed point 612A and the second feed point 612B are respectively located on the adjacent two sides of the first antenna 612; the second antenna 614 has a third feed point 614A and a fourth feed point 614B, the third feed point 614A and the fourth feed point 614B are respectively located on the adjacent two sides of the second antenna 614, the third antenna 616 has a fifth feed point 616A and a sixth feed point 616B, and the fifth feed point 616A and the sixth feed point 616B are respectively located at the second
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the first antenna pattern state.
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the second antenna pattern state.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna 612 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane;
  • the phases of the first antenna 612 of the two antenna pattern states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane, and the angle intervals of the horizontal plane include: [1°, 12°], [16° , 46°], [54°, 80°], etc.
  • Figure 6B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna 614 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state, in which the abscissa represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane; in some horizontal planes
  • the phases of the second antenna 614 of the two antenna pattern states have obvious differences at the angle of the same horizontal plane, and the angle interval of the horizontal plane includes: [3°, 18°], [20°, 46° °], [48°, 92°]°, etc.
  • FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna 616 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane.
  • the phases of the third antenna 616 in the two field states have obvious differences in the same incoming wave direction, and the angular range of the horizontal plane includes: [2°, 18°], [20°, 46° ], [48°, 92°], etc.
  • FIG. 6A , FIG. 6B and FIG. 6C that when the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in different antenna pattern states, there are obvious differences in the phases of the three antennas.
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the first antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement.
  • the solid line in FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 calculated according to the formula in FIG. The phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614;
  • FIGS. 7A and 7B It can be seen from FIGS. 7A and 7B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
  • FIG. 7C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 7C that the angle of arrival ranges from 1° to 360°. The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state intersect only once, that is, the phases under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state only at this intersection point The difference is the same, and the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state is different at other angles of arrival. Therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences under different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the first antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement.
  • the solid line in FIG. 8B is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 calculated according to the formula in FIG. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the second antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B It can be seen from FIGS. 8A and 8B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
  • FIG. 8C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 8C that the range of the angle of arrival is between 1°-360°, The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state only intersect once at about 180° and 220°, that is, only at two intersection points when the first antenna pattern state It is the same as the phase difference in the second antenna pattern state. At other angles of arrival, the phase difference in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state are different. Therefore, different antenna pattern states can be obtained There is a clear difference in the phase difference below.
  • the antenna pattern state of the electronic device is changed, and the phase difference between the antennas with the same incoming wave direction under different antenna pattern states is obviously different, by calculating the different antenna pattern states
  • the phase difference between the antennas, and the real angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined according to the phase difference between the antennas of the different antenna pattern states and the mapping relationship table.
  • the same antenna can generate a variety of different resonances, so that different frequency bands can be obtained under different usage requirements, so that the same antenna can provide a wider frequency band; thus, by switching the antenna's feed point so that one antenna has the effect of multiple antennas.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating that one of the antennas of the antenna unit of the electronic device in an embodiment of the present application realizes the switching of the antenna pattern state by changing the feed point.
  • the electronic device 900 includes a switch unit 910 and an antenna 921, the antenna 921 has two feed points: a first feed point 921A and a second feed point 921B, and the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B are respectively located on adjacent sides of the antenna , the electronic device 900 can control the connection status of the switch unit 910, wherein the electronic device 900 can control the switch unit 910 so that the electronic device 900 can connect to the antenna 921 through the first feed point 921A or the second feed point 921B, for example, the electronic device controls the switch Unit 910, so that the electronic device is connected to the antenna 921 through the first feed point, and the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state; the electronic device controls the switch unit 910, so that the electronic device is connected to the antenna 921 through the second feed point, and the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state; Two antenna pattern states.
  • the switch unit 910 is a single-pole double-throw switch (single-pole double-throw, referred to as SP2T), and the electronic device can control the connection state of SP2T, so that the electronic device 900 can pass through the first feed point 921A or the second feed point 921A.
  • the point 921B is connected to the antenna 921, wherein the electronic device 900 is connected to the antenna 921 through different feed points, and the connection states of SP2T are different.
  • the positions of the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B can be adjusted according to the actual scene, for example, the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B can be respectively located on opposite sides of the antenna 921 or same side.
  • the electronic device can pass through multiple feed points by changing the type of the switch unit 910 and controlling the connection state of the antenna unit 910. One of the points is connected to the antenna.
  • the switch unit can be a single-pole three-throw switch. .
  • each antenna of the electronic device has at least two grounding points, and the connection positions of the at least two grounding points and the corresponding antenna are different, and the electronic device controls one of the at least two grounding points through the switch unit.
  • the connection between the access point and the antenna controls the ground point connected to each antenna so that the electronic equipment is in different antenna pattern states.
  • FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the switching of antenna pattern states in another embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, except that:
  • the electronic device 600 further includes a fourth antenna 618 having a seventh feed point 618A and an eighth feed point 618B.
  • the first feed point 612A and the second feed point 612B are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna 612; the third feed point 614A and the fourth feed point 614B are respectively located on opposite sides of the second antenna 614;
  • the fifth feed point 616A and the sixth feed point 616B are respectively located on opposite sides of the third antenna, and the seventh feed point 618A and the eighth feed point 618B are respectively located on opposite sides of the fourth antenna 618 .
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the third antenna pattern state.
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the fourth antenna pattern state.
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the fifth antenna pattern state.
  • the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the sixth antenna pattern state.
  • the change of the position of the feed point where the feed source is connected to the corresponding antenna will affect the field pattern of the antenna, and then affect the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, that is, by changing the multiple feed points between the feed source and the corresponding antenna in the electronic device
  • Switching between different feed points in the antenna can realize the switching between the antenna pattern states of the antenna unit.
  • the antenna unit can be realized. Switch between antenna pattern states.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna 612 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane.
  • the phases of the first antenna 612 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna 614 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane.
  • the phases of the second antenna 614 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
  • FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna 616 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane.
  • the phases of the third antenna 616 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
  • FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the fourth antenna 618 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state.
  • the abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane.
  • the phases of the fourth antenna 618 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
  • FIG. 11A, FIG. 11B, FIG. 11C and FIG. 11D the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in different antenna pattern states, and the phases of the four antennas are obviously different in some angle intervals of the horizontal plane.
  • the solid line in Fig. 12A is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the third antenna pattern state calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement The phase difference between 612 and the second antenna 614;
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the fourth antenna pattern state
  • the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B It can be seen from FIGS. 12A and 12B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
  • FIG. 12C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 12C that the angle of arrival ranges from 1° to 360°. The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state only intersect once at about 190°, that is, only at this intersection point, the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The phase difference is the same under the antenna pattern state, and the phase difference under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different at other angles of arrival. Therefore, it can be concluded that the phase difference under different antenna pattern states has obvious difference.
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state
  • the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the fourth antenna pattern state
  • the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B It can be seen from FIGS. 13A and 13B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
  • Figure 13C is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state, as can be seen from Figure 13C
  • Figure 12C is the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna phase difference
  • the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 in the field pattern state can be seen from FIG. 13C.
  • the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The two dotted lines of the phase difference below only intersect once at about 180°, that is, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state is the same only at this intersection point, and the third antenna pattern state at other angles of arrival.
  • the phase differences in the antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different, therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences in different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state
  • the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
  • the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the fourth antenna pattern state
  • the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B It can be seen from FIGS. 14A and 14B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
  • Figure 14C is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state, as can be seen from Figure 14C
  • Figure 14C is the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna phase difference
  • the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 in the field pattern state can be seen from FIG. 14C.
  • the angle of arrival ranges between 1°-360°
  • the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The two dotted lines of the phase difference below only intersect once at about 180°, that is, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state is the same only at this intersection point, and the third antenna pattern state at other angles of arrival.
  • the phase differences in the antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different, therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences in different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
  • each antenna can also have 3, 4, 5 or more than 5 feed points, wherein the positions of the multiple feed points of each antenna are not the same, and the multiple feed points can be evenly spaced in the Corresponding to the peripheral side of the antenna, multiple feed points can also be distributed only on the same side of the corresponding antenna.
  • the number of feed points and the distribution positions of the multiple feed points can also be set according to actual needs.
  • the electronic device can be connected to one of the multiple feed points by switching the feed source, so as to change the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit of the electronic device. It can be understood that the electronic device can change the feed points of all antennas at the same time to change the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, and can only change the feed point of at least one antenna among the multiple antennas in the electronic device to change the antenna field of the antenna unit. type state.
  • antenna 1 may be called a first antenna
  • antenna 2 may be called a second antenna
  • antenna 3 may be called a third antenna.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal.
  • the method may include: the electronic device has a positioning function. When the user uses the electronic device for positioning, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores different In the field state, the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the first phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 in the first antenna pattern state; the electronic device The first phase difference can be matched with the mapping relationship table to obtain a first set of signal arrival angles matched with the first phase difference, and the first set of signal arrival angles includes at least two signal arrival angles; The first antenna pattern state is switched to the second antenna pattern state, the second phase difference of the antenna unit in the second antenna pattern state is determined, and the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the signal arrival angle in the second antenna pattern state is matched.
  • the electronic device determine a second set of arrival angles matched with the second phase difference, the second set of arrival angles includes at least one arrival angle; since the received signals under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state are true The angle of arrival remains unchanged, and the angle of arrival at which the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles overlap is the real angle of arrival. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may have two antennas, or three antennas, and four or more antennas.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of antennas in the electronic device. The following embodiments are described by taking an electronic device with three antennas as an example.
  • FIG. 15 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna.
  • the electronic device stores the phases of the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving radio signals from different directions under the antenna field state set. difference, and a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  • the radio signal S1 may be a signal transmitted by a base station, may also be a signal transmitted by a router, or may be a signal transmitted by other electronic devices, which is not limited herein.
  • the electronic device Before receiving the radio signal S1, the electronic device may store the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, and the A mapping relationship table T1 between the phase difference with the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  • the mapping relationship table T1 may be established according to the above steps S401-S407.
  • the mapping relationship table T1 may be the mapping relationship table shown in Table 3 above, or other types of mapping relationship tables. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the electronic device determines the antenna pattern state for receiving the radio signal S1 and calculates the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1.
  • the feed source is electrically connected to the first antenna through the first feed point, and other feed sources pass through the corresponding feed point Connect the corresponding antenna, the antenna unit of the electronic device is in the first antenna pattern state; the feed source is electrically connected to the first antenna through the second feed point, and other feed sources are connected to the corresponding antenna through the corresponding feed point, the antenna unit of the electronic device In the state of the second antenna pattern.
  • the electronic device can also determine the corresponding antenna pattern state in other ways.
  • the electronic device may calculate a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and a second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna.
  • the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna
  • the second antenna of the electronic device receives the radio signal S1
  • the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the second antenna
  • the third antenna of the electronic device receives the radio signal S1
  • the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the third antenna According to the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna, the electronic device can and the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the second antenna It is determined that when receiving the radio signal S1, the phase difference PD1 between the first antenna and the second antenna is According to the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna, the electronic device can and the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the third antenna It is determined that when receiving the radio signal S1, the phase difference PD2 between the first antenna and the third antenna is
  • the electronic device determines a first set of arrival angles matching the first phase difference PD1 and the second phase difference PD2 according to the antenna pattern state, the first phase difference PD1, the second phase difference PD2, and the mapping relationship table T1.
  • the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival.
  • the electronic device determines the first angle-of-arrival subset with the first phase difference PD1 according to the first phase difference PD1 and the mapping relationship table T1, and determines the angle-of-arrival subset with the first phase difference PD2 and the mapping relationship table T1 according to the second phase difference PD2 and the mapping relationship table T1.
  • the second angle-of-arrival subset of the second phase difference PD2 determines the intersection of the first angle-of-arrival subset and the second angle-of-arrival subset, and the intersection is the first angle-of-arrival set.
  • the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna is 1.2 ⁇ , and 1.2 ⁇ in the mapping relationship table T1 corresponds to three arrival angles: 60°, 120° and 150°;
  • the second phase difference is 0.5 ⁇ , and 1.2 ⁇ in the mapping relationship table T1 corresponds to three arrival angles: 60°, 120° and 210°; thus, the first set of arrival angles are 60° and 120°.
  • the mapping relationship table T1 may be stored in an electronic device, or in a cloud server or a server.
  • the electronic device can send the first phase difference PD1 and the second phase difference PD2 to the cloud server or server, and the cloud server or server can match the first phase difference PD1 , the first arrival angle set corresponding to the second phase difference PD2 and the arrival angle in the mapping relationship table T1.
  • the electronic device may calculate the similarity between the first phase difference and the second phase difference and the phase differences corresponding to all arrival angles in the mapping relationship table.
  • the electronic device may determine the similarity by calculating a sum of differences between the first phase difference and the second phase difference and phase differences corresponding to all arrival angles in the mapping relationship table. The larger the sum of differences, the lower the similarity; conversely, the higher the sum of differences, the higher the similarity.
  • mapping relationship table T1 is the mapping relationship table shown in Table 4.
  • the formula for calculating the sum of the phase difference values corresponding to all arrival angles in the first phase difference, the second phase difference and the image relationship table can be as follows:
  • the electronic device can calculate Error0(0°), Error0(1°), Error0(2°), . . . , Error0(359°) according to the above formula 1.
  • the electronic device can compare the magnitudes of Error0(0°), Error0(1°), Error0(2°), . . . , Error0(359°).
  • the electronic device takes the angle corresponding to the smallest difference sum as the arrival angle of the radio signal S1. For example, if Error0(0°) is the smallest, the electronic device determines that the arrival angle of the radio signal S1 is 0°. If Error0(1°) is the smallest, the electronic device determines that the angle of arrival of the radio signal S1 is 1°. If Error0 (359°) is the smallest, then the electronic device determines that the arrival angle of the radio signal S1 is 359°. And a first set of arrival angles is formed according to the determined arrival angles.
  • the electronic device switches the antenna pattern state, and calculates the third phase difference PD3 between the first antenna and the second antenna and the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1 under the switched antenna pattern state
  • the fourth phase difference PD4 The fourth phase difference PD4.
  • the electronic device selects different feed points of the antenna through a switch, so as to realize switching of different antenna pattern states of the antenna unit.
  • the electronic device determines the second arrival angle set matching the third phase difference PD3 and the fourth phase difference PD4 according to the switched antenna pattern state, the third phase difference PD3, the fourth phase difference PD4, and the mapping relationship table T1 .
  • the second set of angles of arrival includes at least one angle of arrival.
  • the electronic device determines the first angle-of-arrival subset with the third phase difference PD3 according to the third phase difference PD3 and the mapping relationship table T1, and determines the angle-of-arrival subset with the third phase difference PD4 and the mapping relationship table T1 according to the fourth phase difference PD4 and the mapping relationship table T1.
  • the fourth angle-of-arrival subset of the fourth phase difference PD4 determines the intersection of the third angle-of-arrival subset and the fourth angle-of-arrival subset, and the intersection is the second angle-of-arrival set.
  • the intersection of the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles is determined, the intersection includes only one arrival angle, and the intersection is the real arrival angle.
  • the electronic device when the user uses the electronic device for positioning, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores the information of all antenna pattern states and the distance between the antennas.
  • the mapping relationship table between the phase difference of the radio signal and the arrival angle of the radio signal can determine the current antenna pattern state and calculate the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1, and determine the phase difference corresponding to the phase difference in the mapping relationship table Matching first set of arrival angles; switch the antenna pattern state of the electronic device, and calculate the phase difference under the switched antenna pattern state, and the electronic device determines the second arrival angle set in the mapping relationship table that matches the phase difference , determine the real angle of arrival according to the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles.
  • the same phase difference value may correspond to different angles of arrival, by obtaining the phase difference under different antenna pattern states, and based on The phase difference under different antenna pattern states determines the corresponding angle of arrival. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
  • the intersection of the first angle of arrival set and the second angle of arrival set is determined, and the intersection includes at least two angles of arrival, and steps S153 and S154 are re-executed to obtain another antenna pattern state Phase difference, and determine the third set of arrival angles that the phase difference matches, and then determine the intersection of the first set of arrival angles, the second set of arrival angles and the third set of arrival angles, and repeat the above steps until there is only one set of arrival angles in the obtained intersection Arrival angle, the arrival angle is the real arrival angle.
  • the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the first antenna and the second antenna.
  • the electronic device may receive the radio signal S1 through the first antenna and the second antenna.
  • the electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna and the second antenna.
  • the electronic device stores radio signals of different azimuths, the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the angle of arrival Mapping relationship table T2; in the first antenna pattern state, the electronic device calculates the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving the radio signal S1; determine the first phase difference that matches the first phase difference in the mapping relationship table T2 A set of arrival angles; when switching to the second antenna pattern state, the electronic device calculates the second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving the radio signal S1 with the same incoming wave direction; determine the second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the mapping relationship table T2 and The second set of angles of arrival matched with the second phase difference determines the real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
  • the mapping relationship table T2 For the establishment process of the mapping relationship table T2, reference may be made to the description in steps S150-S154, which will not be repeated here
  • the electronic device can have more antennas here.
  • the process of estimating the angle of arrival of the signal by the electronic device can refer to the description in steps S150-S154, which will not be repeated here.
  • both the mapping relationship table T1 and the mapping relationship table T2 may be referred to as the first mapping table.
  • FIG. 16 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna.
  • the electronic device stores the data of the first antenna and the second antenna when the electronic device receives radio signals from different directions under the antenna field state set.
  • the phase difference of the antennas and the mapping relationship table between the phase difference of the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal are examples of the radio signal S1 and the third antenna.
  • the set of antenna pattern states includes at least two antenna pattern states achievable by the electronic device. For example, if the electronic device switches the antenna pattern state by switching the antenna feed point, and the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna all have Two feed points; if the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna need to switch feed points each time the antenna pattern state is switched, then the antenna pattern state set of the electronic device has two antenna pattern states; If the electronic device only needs to switch the feed point of any one of the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna each time the antenna pattern state is switched, then the antenna pattern state set of the electronic device has six antenna patterns state.
  • the electronic device When receiving radio signals from different directions, the electronic device stores the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under the set of antenna pattern states. Mapping table. For the process of establishing the mapping relationship table by the electronic device, reference may be made to the above step S401-step S407, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device determines the current antenna pattern state and calculates a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and a second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1.
  • the electronic device records and stores the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna under the current antenna pattern state.
  • the electronic device determines whether to record and store the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set. If the electronic device does not record and store the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set, execute S164; If the electronic device has recorded and stored the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all the antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set, execute S165.
  • the electronic device determines that the antenna pattern state has not recorded and stored the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna, and switches the current antenna pattern state to Unrecorded and stored antenna pattern states. Then jump to step S161.
  • the electronic device determines that the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna are not recorded and stored in the antenna pattern state set.
  • the antenna pattern state of the second phase difference of the third antenna is not recorded and stored in the antenna pattern state set.
  • the electronic device determines the real angle of arrival according to the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when the electronic device receives the radio signal under the mapping relationship table and the stored antenna pattern state set.
  • the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores the phase between the antennas under the antenna pattern state set The mapping relationship between the difference and the angle of arrival of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 under the antenna pattern state set, because the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, the antenna
  • the arrival angles of the received signals are all the same, but the phase difference between the antennas is obviously different under different antenna pattern states.
  • the same phase difference corresponds to multiple arrival angles. question. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
  • the mathematical regression model is queried by establishing the angle of arrival.
  • the phase difference is set as a feature value, and the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference is set as a tag value;
  • the phase difference value in the type state is input into the mathematical regression model to obtain the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
  • an arrival angle calculation function may be stored in the electronic device.
  • the angle-of-arrival calculation function can output the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference.
  • the phase difference 3° input to the angle-of-arrival calculation function and the identification 1 of the corresponding antenna pattern state the angle-of-arrival output of the angle-of-arrival calculation function are 30° and 120°; the phase difference input to the angle-of-arrival calculation function is 3° , 7° and the corresponding signs 1 and 2 of the antenna pattern state, the arrival angle output by the angle-of-arrival calculation function is 120°.
  • the antenna pattern state identifier is used to identify the corresponding antenna pattern state.
  • the angle-of-arrival calculation function may be a machine model trained by historical data of the electronic device based on a mathematical algorithm, wherein the mathematical algorithm may be a neural network algorithm, a random forest algorithm, etc., and the historical data is the antenna unit of the electronic device.
  • the different angles of arrival under the set of antenna pattern states, and the set of phase differences corresponding to different angles of arrival, the historical data can be the data of the mapping relationship table recorded in the manner described in Figure 4, or the data obtained by other means, In this regard, this application does not make a limitation.
  • angle-of-arrival calculation function may also be determined based on other methods, for example, a multi-dimensional function formed based on the calculation rules between the angle-of-arrival and the phase difference, and the implementation of the function is not limited in this application.
  • the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch at least once among multiple antenna patterns, for example, switching from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state.
  • Obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states for example, the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving radio signals with the same angle of arrival;
  • the two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern state identification are input into the angle of arrival calculation function; if the output of the angle of arrival calculation function includes only one angle of arrival, then the angle of arrival is the angle of arrival of the signal; if the angle of arrival calculation function outputs at least two angle of arrival, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch again under multiple antenna pattern states, for example, switching from the second antenna pattern state to the third antenna pattern state, and the obtained phase difference and the corresponding antenna pattern state
  • the identification input calculation function of the angle of arrival the above steps are repeated until the output of the calculation function of the angle of arrival includes only one angle of
  • the electronic device when the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, the electronic device controls the different antenna field shapes of the antenna unit in the multiple antenna field shapes to switch sequentially until each antenna unit obtains
  • the phase difference between the antennas corresponding to the antenna pattern unit; the phase difference and the identification of the corresponding antenna pattern state are input into the angle of arrival calculation function; the angle of arrival output by the angle of arrival calculation function is the angle of arrival of the signal.
  • the electronic device 100 may include an antenna unit 10 , a radio frequency front-end unit 20 , and a signal processing and control unit 30 .
  • FIG. 17 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
  • the electronic device receives radio signals through the antenna unit
  • the antenna unit 10 may include 2 antennas, or 3 antennas, or 4 antennas, or more than 4 antennas.
  • the number of antennas in the antenna unit 10 is not limited here.
  • the antenna unit 10 of the electronic device 100 sends the received radio signal to the RF front-end unit 20 .
  • the radio frequency front-end unit may include multiple radio frequency front-end modules. It can be understood that one antenna may correspond to one radio frequency front-end module. Each antenna can send the received radio signal to the corresponding radio frequency front-end module.
  • radio frequency front-end unit 20 may include radio frequency front-end module 1 corresponding to antenna 1 and radio frequency front-end module 2 corresponding to antenna 2 .
  • the antenna 1 can send the received radio signal to the radio frequency front-end module 1 .
  • the antenna 2 can send the received radio signal to the radio frequency front-end module 2 .
  • the RF front-end unit 20 of the electronic device 100 converts radio signals into baseband signals.
  • the radio frequency front-end module 1 can convert the radio signal received by the antenna 1 into a baseband signal 1 .
  • the radio frequency front-end module 2 can convert the radio signal received by the antenna 2 into a baseband signal 2 .
  • the radio frequency front-end unit 20 of the electronic device 100 sends a baseband signal to the signal processing and control unit 30 .
  • the RF front-end module 1 and the RF front-end module 2 in the RF front-end unit 20 may send the baseband signal 1 and the baseband signal 2 to the signal processing and control unit 30 respectively.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 calculates the phase difference between the received baseband signals.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 can calculate the phase difference between the baseband signal 1 and the baseband signal 2 .
  • step S175 reference may be made to the description of calculating the phase difference by the electronic device in step S151, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival.
  • the mapping relationship table stores the phase differences corresponding to all angles of arrival under the antenna pattern state set, and the antenna pattern state set includes all antenna pattern states supported by the electronic device.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 matches the calculated phase difference and the current antenna pattern state with the mapping relationship table to determine the first set of arrival angles matching the phase difference.
  • mapping relationship table reference may be made to the description of the mapping relationship table in the above steps, which will not be repeated here.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 switches the antenna pattern state, and calculates the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 in the switched antenna pattern state.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 determines the second set of arrival angles matching the phase difference according to the phase difference between the antennas in the switched antenna pattern state and the mapping relationship table.
  • the signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 determines the real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal, the method may include: when the user uses an electronic device for positioning, the electronic device may receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores a set of antenna pattern states Below is the mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the phase difference between the antennas and determine the phase difference between the antennas and determine the phase difference in the mapping relationship table when receiving the radio signal S1 in the current antenna pattern state.
  • the first angle-of-arrival set that matches the difference; switch the antenna pattern state of the electronic device, and calculate the phase difference corresponding to the switched antenna pattern state, and the electronic device determines the second phase difference that matches the second phase difference in the mapping relationship table.
  • the second set of arrival angles is to determine the real arrival angle according to the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles. Since, under different antenna pattern states, the phase difference between antennas is significantly different and under the same antenna pattern state, the same phase difference value may correspond to different angles of arrival, by obtaining the phase difference under different antenna pattern states, and based on The phase difference under different antenna pattern states determines the corresponding angle of arrival. In this way, the accuracy rate of the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device can be improved.
  • Figure 18A is the simulation result of the electronic device estimating the angle of arrival through only one antenna pattern state
  • the antenna pattern state of the electronic device in Figure 18A is fixed and only one, from Figure 18A it can be obtained
  • the electronic equipment estimates the angle of arrival through the phase difference between the antennas of the single antenna pattern state
  • the angle of arrival of many incoming wave directions will be confused, such as 25° ⁇ 45°, 130° ⁇ 150°, 205° ⁇ 225° °, 310° ⁇ 330°, all have very serious confusion (over 100 degree confusion);
  • Figure 18B the electronic device has two antenna field states and the electronic device can switch between the two antenna field states.
  • the angle of arrival is estimated by switching between the two antenna pattern states.
  • the exemplary electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is firstly introduced below.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in the figures, may combine two or more components, or may have a different configuration of components.
  • the various components shown in the figures may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2.
  • Mobile communication module 150 wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194 and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit, NPU
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input and output
  • subscriber identity module subscriber identity module
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the electronic device 100 may further include more antennas, such as the antenna 3 , the antenna 4 , . . . , and the antenna N.
  • Antenna 3 , antenna 4 , . . . , and antenna N are used to receive radio signals.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 in the electronic device may be external antennas or built-in antennas, which are not limited here.
  • the types of external antennas may include: monopole antennas, helical antennas, and PCB (Printed circuit board, printed circuit board) helical antennas.
  • Built-in antennas can include: microstrip patch antenna, slot antenna, IFA antenna (Inverted-F Antenna, inverted F antenna), PIFA antenna (planar Inverted-F Antenna, planar inverted F antenna), FPC (flexible printed circuit, flexible printing circuits) antennas, etc.
  • the transmit antenna has a maximum power rating
  • the receive antenna has noise rejection parameters.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 may further include a radio frequency front-end module.
  • the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 1 is used to convert the radio signal (for example, electromagnetic wave) received by the antenna 1 into a baseband signal.
  • the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 2 is used to convert the radio signal received by the antenna 2 into a baseband signal.
  • the antenna 1 and the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 1 may be coupled in one antenna chip.
  • the antenna 2 and the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 2 may be coupled in one antenna chip.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves and radiate them through the antenna 1 .
  • At least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100.
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc.
  • the GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • Beidou navigation satellite system beidou navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • NVM non-volatile memory
  • Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous dynamic random access memory, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, such as the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.;
  • SRAM static random-access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR5SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Non-volatile memory may include magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory (flash memory).
  • flash memory can include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc.
  • it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), three-level storage unit (triple-level cell, TLC), fourth-level storage unit (quad-level cell, QLC), etc.
  • can include universal flash storage English: universal flash storage, UFS) according to storage specifications , embedded multimedia memory card (embedded multi media Card, eMMC), etc.
  • the random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, and can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of an operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store data of users and application programs.
  • the non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and data of users and application programs, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for the processor 110 to directly read and write.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the receiver 170B can be placed close to the human ear to receive the voice.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a phone call or sending a voice message, the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also known as “touch panel”.
  • the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the system is divided into four layers, which are application program layer, application program framework layer, runtime (Runtime) and system library, and kernel layer from top to bottom.
  • the application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
  • the application package may include application programs (also called applications) such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
  • application programs also called applications
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog interface. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
  • Runtime includes the core library and virtual machine. Runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the system.
  • the core library includes two parts: one part is the function function that the programming language (for example, jave language) needs to call, and the other part is the core library of the system.
  • one part is the function function that the programming language (for example, jave language) needs to call
  • the other part is the core library of the system.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes programming files (for example, jave files) of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem, and provides fusion of two-dimensional (2-Dimensional, 2D) and three-dimensional (3-Dimensional, 3D) layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, a sensor driver, and a virtual card driver.
  • the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
  • a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example.
  • the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer.
  • Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the term “when” may be interpreted to mean “if” or “after” or “in response to determining" or “in response to detecting".
  • the phrase “in determining” or “if detected (a stated condition or event)” may be interpreted to mean “if determining" or “in response to determining" or “on detecting (a stated condition or event)” or “in response to detecting (a stated condition or event)”.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state hard disk), etc.
  • the processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware.
  • the programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media.
  • When the programs are executed may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Variable-Direction Aerials And Aerial Arrays (AREA)

Abstract

A signal angle-of-arrival estimation method, which is applied to an electronic device, wherein the electronic device comprises an antenna unit, the antenna unit comprises a first antenna and a second antenna, and the antenna unit has at least two antenna field type states. The method comprises: an electronic device controlling an antenna unit to switch between at least two antenna field type states; in each antenna field type state, the electronic device receiving, by means of a first antenna and a second antenna, radio signals having the same angle of arrival, and calculating a phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two corresponding phase differences in the at least two antenna field type states; and the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signals according to the at least two phase differences. By means of the method, an electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of a radio signal. Further provided are a computer-readable storage medium and a computer program product.

Description

信号到达角度估计方法及相关设备Signal Arrival Angle Estimation Method and Related Equipment
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请主张于2021年11月12日提交中国专利局,申请号为202111369078.7、申请名称为“信号到达角度估计方法及相关设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202111369078.7 and the application title "Signal Angle of Arrival Estimation Method and Related Equipment" submitted to the China Patent Office on November 12, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种信号到达角度估计方法及相关设备。The present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal and related equipment.
背景技术Background technique
基于信号到达角度(angle of arrival,AOA)的定位算法,经常被用于电子设备定位技术中。电子设备根据多天线采集的信号的相位差获取待定位电子设备和多天线所在直线之间的信号到达角。根据待定位电子设备和不同直线之间的信号到达角确定待定位电子设备的位置。Positioning algorithms based on signal angle of arrival (AOA) are often used in electronic device positioning technology. The electronic device obtains the angle of arrival of the signal between the electronic device to be positioned and the straight line where the multiple antennas are located according to the phase difference of the signals collected by the multiple antennas. The position of the electronic device to be positioned is determined according to the angle of arrival of signals between the electronic device to be positioned and different straight lines.
由于电子设备的硬件性能并非处于理想状态,因此常常出现电子设备的接收同一无线信号时测得的天线间的相位差对应多个到达角度;依据计算的相位差确定来波方向的到达角度时,无法确定真实的到达角度,导致信号到达角度估算出现严重错误。这样,导致电子设备通过天线间的相位差估算出的信号到达角度准确率不高。Since the hardware performance of the electronic device is not in an ideal state, it often occurs that the phase difference between the antennas measured by the electronic device when receiving the same wireless signal corresponds to multiple arrival angles; when determining the arrival angle of the direction of arrival based on the calculated phase difference, The true angle of arrival cannot be determined, leading to serious errors in the estimation of the signal angle of arrival. In this way, the accuracy of the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device through the phase difference between the antennas is not high.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种信号到达角度估计方法及相关设备,通过该信号到达角度估计方法,电子设备可以更为准确地估计出电子设备接收的无线电信号的到达角度。The present application provides a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival and related equipment, through which an electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of a radio signal received by the electronic device.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种信号到达角度估计方法,该方法应用于电子设备,所述电子设备包括天线单元,所述天线单元包括第一天线和第二天线,所述天线单元具有多个天线场型状态,所述方法包括:In a first aspect, the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal, the method is applied to an electronic device, the electronic device includes an antenna unit, the antenna unit includes a first antenna and a second antenna, and the antenna unit has multiple An antenna pattern state, the method includes:
所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差;The electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device receives the same arrival signal through the first antenna and the second antenna and calculating the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states;
所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The electronic device determines the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences.
由于同一天线场型状态下的天线间的相位差可能对应多个到达角度,本申请提供的方法可在多个场型状态下切换,以得到至少两个天线场型状态对应的至少两个相位差,并依据该至少两个相位差及对应的天线场型状态可唯一确定无线信号实际的到达角度,通过至少两个天线场型状态下的相位差确定无线信号的到达角度,以提升到达角度的准确性。Since the phase difference between antennas in the same antenna pattern state may correspond to multiple angles of arrival, the method provided in this application can switch between multiple pattern states to obtain at least two phases corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states difference, and based on the at least two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern states, the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be uniquely determined, and the angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be determined by the phase difference of at least two antenna pattern states to improve the angle of arrival accuracy.
其中,本申请中多个天线场型状态,多个可为两个或大于两个。Among the multiple antenna pattern states in the present application, there may be two or more than two.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中 切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
在所述多个天线场型状态中的第一天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号;In a first antenna pattern state of the plurality of antenna pattern states, the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和预设的映射关系表确定第一到达角度集合,其中,所述映射关系表包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差;The electronic device determines a first set of arrival angles according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and a preset mapping relationship table, wherein the mapping relationship table includes multiple antenna pattern states different angles of arrival, and phase differences between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
若所述第一到达角度集合包括至少两个到达角度,所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第一天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第二天线场型状态,并通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下接收所述无线电信号;If the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival, the electronic device switches the antenna unit from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states state, and receiving said radio signal by said first antenna and said second antenna in said second antenna pattern state;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下的第二相位差。The electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
获取每种天线场型状态下的相位差之后,首先依据预设的映射关系表及相位差确定相位角对应的到达角度的数量,若该相位差对应的到达角度的数量大于1个,则切换天线场型状态并获取对应天线场型状态对应的相位差;若该相位差对应的到达角度仅为一个,则该到达角度即为实际的到达角度。After obtaining the phase difference in each antenna pattern state, first determine the number of arrival angles corresponding to the phase angle according to the preset mapping relationship table and the phase difference. If the number of arrival angles corresponding to the phase difference is greater than 1, switch The antenna pattern state and obtain the phase difference corresponding to the corresponding antenna pattern state; if the phase difference corresponds to only one angle of arrival, then the angle of arrival is the actual angle of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:所述电子设备依据所述第二相位差、所述第二天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第二到达角度集合;In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the second phase difference and the second antenna pattern The state and the mapping relationship table determine a second set of arrival angles;
所述电子设备根据所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The electronic device determines an angle of arrival of the radio signal based on the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
如此,依据相位差、该相位差对应的天线场型状态及映射关系表确定对应的到达角度集合,其中到达角度集合包括至少一个到达角度,通过两个天线场型状态下对应的两个到达角度集合确定无线信号的实际的到达角度。In this way, the corresponding arrival angle set is determined according to the phase difference, the antenna pattern state corresponding to the phase difference, and the mapping relationship table, wherein the arrival angle set includes at least one arrival angle, and the two arrival angles corresponding to the two antenna pattern states The set determines the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备根据所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:In a possible implementation manner, determining, by the electronic device, the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival includes:
确定所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合的交集;determining an intersection of the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival;
若所述交集包括一个到达角度,则确定所述到达角度为所述无线电信号的到达角度。If the intersection includes an angle of arrival, then determine the angle of arrival as the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
通过获取两个到达角度的交集以确定实际的到达角度。The actual angle of arrival is determined by obtaining the intersection of the two angles of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若所述交集包括至少两个到达角度,所述方法还包括:In a possible implementation, if the intersection includes at least two angles of arrival, the method further includes:
所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第二天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第三天线场型状态,并通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第三天线场型状态下接收所述无线电信号;The electronic device switches the antenna unit from the second antenna pattern state to a third antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and through the first antenna and the second antenna receiving said radio signal in said third antenna pattern state;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述三天线场型状态下的第三相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a third phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the three antennas;
所述电子设备依据所述第三相位差、所述第三天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第三 到达角度集合;The electronic device determines a third angle-of-arrival set according to the third phase difference, the third antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
依据所述交集和所述第三到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined from the intersection and the third set of angles of arrival.
若通过两个场型状态下确定的到达角度大于两个,则控制天线单元切换天线场型状态并获取该天线场型状态下对应的到达角度集合,并依据获取的所有到达角度的交集确定实际的到达角度。If the angle of arrival determined by the two pattern states is greater than two, control the antenna unit to switch the antenna pattern state and obtain the corresponding arrival angle set under the antenna pattern state, and determine the actual angle of arrival according to the intersection of all obtained angles of arrival. angle of arrival.
当然,当通过三个天线场型状态对应的到达角度集合确定的到达角度的个数大于两个,可通过再次切换天线场型状态,并获取该天线场型状态下对应的到达角度集合,并依据获取的所有到达角度的交集确定实际的到达角度,循环以上步骤,直至获得的到达角度的数量为一个。Of course, when the number of angles of arrival determined by the angle-of-arrival sets corresponding to the three antenna pattern states is greater than two, you can switch the antenna pattern state again, and obtain the corresponding angle-of-arrival set under the antenna pattern state, and The actual arrival angle is determined according to the intersection of all obtained arrival angles, and the above steps are repeated until the number of obtained arrival angles is one.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在至少两个天线场型状态中不同的天线场型状态依次切换;在所述切换过程中,所述电子设备在每个天线场型状态下通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算每个天线场型状态下所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到所述天线单元的所有天线场型状态对应所述第一天线和所述第二天线的至少两个相位差。The electronic device controls the antenna unit to sequentially switch between different antenna pattern states in at least two antenna pattern states; during the switching process, the electronic device passes through the first antenna pattern state in each antenna pattern state An antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in each antenna pattern state, so as to obtain all antenna fields of the antenna unit A type state corresponds to at least two phase differences of the first antenna and the second antenna.
通过依次切换天线场型状态,直至获得所有天线场型状态对应所述第一天线和所述第二天线的至少两个相位差。By sequentially switching the antenna pattern states until at least two phase differences corresponding to the first antenna and the second antenna are obtained for all antenna pattern states.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:依据每个天线场型状态下所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差与预设的映射关系表确定对应的到达角集合,以得到所述至少两个天线场型状态对应的至少两个所述到达角集合,所述映射关系表包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差;In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: according to each antenna pattern state of the first antenna and the second antenna The phase difference and the preset mapping relationship table determine the corresponding arrival angle set, so as to obtain at least two arrival angle sets corresponding to the at least two antenna pattern states, and the mapping relationship table includes a plurality of antenna pattern states different angles of arrival in the state, and the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
依据至少两个所述到达角集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined based on at least two of the sets of angles of arrival.
这样,通过映射关系表及获取的相位差可确定相位差对应的到达角集合,并依据多个到达角集合确定无线信号实际的到达角度。In this way, the set of angles of arrival corresponding to the phase difference can be determined through the mapping relationship table and the obtained phase difference, and the actual angle of arrival of the wireless signal can be determined according to the multiple sets of angles of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the multiple antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device uses the first antenna and the The second antenna receives radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculates the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states including:
在所述多个天线场型状态中的第一天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号;In a first antenna pattern state of the plurality of antenna pattern states, the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
所述电子设备将所述第一天线场型状态的标识及所述第一相位差输入预设的到达角度计算函数,若所述到达角度计算函数输出至少两个到达角度,所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第一天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第二天线场型状态,并通过所述第 一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下接收所述无线电信号;The electronic device inputs the identification of the first antenna pattern state and the first phase difference into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function, and if the angle-of-arrival calculation function outputs at least two angles of arrival, the electronic device will The antenna unit is switched from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and the second antenna pattern state is switched between the first antenna and the second antenna receiving the radio signal in an antenna pattern state;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下的第二相位差。The electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
如此,依据相位差、该相位差对应的天线场型状态及预设的到达角度计算函数确定对应的到达角度集合,其中到达角度集合包括至少一个到达角度,通过两个天线场型状态下对应的两个到达角度集合确定无线信号的实际的到达角度。In this way, the corresponding arrival angle set is determined according to the phase difference, the antenna pattern state corresponding to the phase difference, and the preset angle-of-arrival calculation function, wherein the arrival angle set includes at least one angle-of-arrival, through the two corresponding antenna pattern states The two angle-of-arrival sets determine the actual angle-of-arrival of the radio signal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:In a possible implementation manner, determining, by the electronic device, the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes:
将所述至少两个相位差及对应的天线场型状态输入预设的到达角度计算函数,以得到所述无线电信号的到达角度。The at least two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern states are input into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function to obtain the angle-of-arrival of the radio signal.
通过至少两个相位差及对应的天线场型状态、预设的到达角度计算函数以得到所述无线电信号的到达角度。The angle of arrival of the radio signal is obtained by using at least two phase differences, corresponding antenna pattern states, and a preset angle of arrival calculation function.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first antenna has at least two first feed points, and the electronic device controlling the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
如此,通过改变天线的馈点以实现将天线场型状态中切换。In this way, the antenna pattern can be switched between the antenna pattern states by changing the feed point of the antenna.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一接地点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first antenna has at least two first ground points, and the electronic device controlling the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第一接地点中不同接地点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls switching of different grounding points among at least two first grounding points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
如此,通过改变天线的接地点以实现将天线场型状态的切换。即仅改变多个天线中一个天线的馈点即可实现天线场型状态的切换。In this way, the switching of the antenna pattern state is realized by changing the ground point of the antenna. That is, only changing the feed point of one of the multiple antennas can realize the switching of the antenna pattern state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点,所述第二天线包括至少两个第二馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first antenna has at least two first feed points, the second antenna includes at least two second feed points, and the electronic device controls the antenna unit to Switching between the two antenna pattern states includes:
所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换和所述第二天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第二馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source and at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source Switching between different feed points in the antenna unit, so as to realize the switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
如此,通过改变所有的天线的馈点以实现将天线场型状态的切换。In this way, the switching of the antenna pattern state is realized by changing the feeding points of all the antennas.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相对两侧或所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相邻两侧。In a possible implementation manner, two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna or two feed points of the at least two first feed points The points are respectively located on adjacent two sides of the first antenna.
如此,位于天线的两侧的馈点与天线中心的连线的夹角、位于相邻两侧的馈点的与天线中心的连线的夹角,角度变化角度,对应天线场型状态对应的相位变化也较明显,便于依据该相位变化确定相位差的变化,从而可更准确确定到达角度。In this way, the angle between the feed point on both sides of the antenna and the line connecting the antenna center, the angle between the feed point on the adjacent two sides and the antenna center, and the angle change angle correspond to the antenna pattern state. The phase change is also more obvious, and it is convenient to determine the change of the phase difference according to the phase change, so that the angle of arrival can be determined more accurately.
优选地,位于天线的两侧的馈点与天线中心的连线的夹角可为180度,位于相邻两侧的馈点的与天线中心的连线的夹角可为90度。Preferably, the included angle between the feed points on both sides of the antenna and the antenna center may be 180 degrees, and the included angle between the feed points on adjacent two sides and the antenna center may be 90 degrees.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相对两侧,所述至少两个第二馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第二天线的相对两侧,或所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相邻两侧,所述至少两个第二馈 点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第二天线的相邻两侧。In a possible implementation manner, two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna, and two feed points of the at least two second feed points The points are respectively located on opposite sides of the second antenna, or the two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on adjacent sides of the first antenna, and the at least two second feed points The two feed points in the points are respectively located on adjacent two sides of the second antenna.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述天线单元还包括第三天线,所述映射关系表还包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第三天线的相位差。In a possible implementation manner, the antenna unit further includes a third antenna, and the mapping relationship table further includes different angles of arrival under multiple antenna pattern states, and all angles of arrival corresponding to different angles of arrival of the radio signal. phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna.
其中,天线单元的天线数量可为3个,4个或5个,本申请不限定天线的数量。Wherein, the number of antennas of the antenna unit may be 3, 4 or 5, and the application does not limit the number of antennas.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号,包括:In a possible implementation manner, receiving radio signals by the electronic device through the first antenna and the second antenna includes:
所述电子设备通过所述第一天线、所述第二天线和所述第三天线接收无线电信号;所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差,包括:The electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna; the electronic device calculates that the first antenna and the second antenna are in the field of the first antenna The first phase difference in the type state, including:
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第三天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第三相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a third phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第一到达角度集合,包括:The electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival set according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table, including:
所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第一到达角度子集合;The electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival subset according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
所述电子设备依据所述第三相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第二到达角度子集合;The electronic device determines a second angle-of-arrival subset according to the third phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
依据所述第一到达角子集合和所述第二到达角子集合确定第一到达角集合。A first set of angles of arrival is determined according to the first subset of angles of arrival and the second subset of angles of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点,所述第二天线具有至少两个第二馈点,所述第三天线具有至少两个第三馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first antenna has at least two first feed points, the second antenna has at least two second feed points, and the third antenna has at least two third feed points , the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states, including:
所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换、所述第二天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第二馈点中不同馈点的切换,所述第三天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第三馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls the switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, and the switching between the at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source. The switching of the feed point, the switching of different feed points among at least two third feed points between the third antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize the switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
第二方面,提供一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括两个或大于两个天线、显示屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;一个或多个处理器与两个或大于两个天线、一个或多个存储器以及显示屏耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面的任一中可能的方式中的信号到达角度估计方法。In a second aspect, an electronic device is provided, which may include two or more than two antennas, a display screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories; one or more processors and two or more Two antennas, one or more memories and a display screen are coupled, one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device performs the above-mentioned A method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal in any possible manner of the first aspect.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的信号到达角度估计方法。In the third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, when the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the signal arrival angle in any possible implementation of any one of the above aspects Estimation method.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的信号到达角度估计方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute the method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal in any possible implementation manner of any one of the above aspects.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的利用相位差估算信号到达角度模型示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a model for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal using a phase difference provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备中天线放置示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of antenna placement in an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备接收信号的示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device receiving a signal provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的手机建立映射关系表方法的流程示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for establishing a mapping relationship table by a mobile phone provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5A为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的天线单元处于第一天线场型状态的示意图;FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application in the first antenna pattern state;
图5B为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的天线单元处于第二天线场型状态的示意图;5B is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application in the second antenna pattern state;
图6A为本申请实施例提供的第一天线在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6B为本申请实施例提供的第二天线在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6C为本申请实施例提供的第三天线在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的第一天线场型状态下第一天线和第二天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the first antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7B为本申请实施例提供的第二天线场型状态下第一天线和第二天线的相位差的示意图;7B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7C为本申请实施例提供的第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态的第一天线和第二天线的相位差的比较示意图;FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the second antenna under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请实施例提供的第一天线场型状态下第一天线和第三天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the first antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8B为本申请实施例提供的第二天线场型状态下第一天线和第三天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8C为本申请实施例提供的第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态的第一天线和第三天线的相位差的比较示意图;FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the third antenna under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的天线单元改变馈点的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of changing the feeding point of the antenna unit of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10A为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的天线单元处于第三天线场型状态的示意图;FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10B为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的天线单元处于第四天线场型状态的示意图;FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of the antenna unit of the electronic device in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11A为本申请实施例提供的第一天线在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;Fig. 11A is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11B为本申请实施例提供的第二天线在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;Fig. 11B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11C为本申请实施例提供的第三天线在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11D为本申请实施例提供的第四天线在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图;FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state according to the embodiment of the present application;
图12A为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下第一天线和第二天线的相位差的示意图;12A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12B为本申请实施例提供的第四天线场型状态下第一天线和第二天线的相位差的示意 图;12B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12C为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态的第一天线和第二天线的相位差的比较示意图;FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the second antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13A为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下第一天线和第三天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13B为本申请实施例提供的第四天线场型状态下第一天线和第三天线的相位差的示意图;13B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13C为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态的第一天线和第三天线的相位差的比较示意图;FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the third antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14A为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下第一天线和第四天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14B为本申请实施例提供的第四天线场型状态下第一天线和第四天线的相位差的示意图;FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14C为本申请实施例提供的第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态的第一天线和第四天线的相位差的比较示意图;Fig. 14C is a schematic diagram of the phase difference comparison between the first antenna and the fourth antenna in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请另一实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18A为本申请实施例提供的单天线场型状态下混淆角度分布示意图;FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram of the distribution of confusion angles under the single-antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图18B为本申请实施例提供的双天线场型状态下混淆角度分布示意图;FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram of the distribution of confusion angles under the dual-antenna pattern state provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的架构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的软件框架示意图。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a software framework of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请以下实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的,而并非旨在作为对本申请的限制。如在本申请的说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样,单数表达形式“一个”、“一种”、“所述”、“上述”、“该”和“这一”旨在也包括复数表达形式,除非其上下文中明确地有相反指示。还应当理解,本申请中使用的术语“和/或”是指并包含一个或多个所列出项目的任何或所有可能组合。The terms used in the following embodiments of the present application are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the present application. As used in the specification and appended claims of this application, the singular expressions "a", "an", "said", "above", "the" and "this" are intended to also Plural expressions are included unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It should also be understood that the term "and/or" as used in this application refers to and includes any and all possible combinations of one or more of the listed items.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the "multiple" The meaning is two or more.
由于本申请实施例涉及一种信号到达角度估计方法的应用,为了便于理解,下面先对本申请实施例涉及的相关术语及概念进行介绍。Since the embodiment of the present application relates to the application of a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal, for ease of understanding, the relevant terms and concepts involved in the embodiment of the present application are firstly introduced below.
1、到达角度1. Arrival angle
在本申请实施例中,到达角度可以是指信号发射装置发射的信号,与电子设备中天线所构成的夹角,称为到达角度,又可以称为入射角。如图1中所示,无线电信号与天线1和 天线2所构成的夹角θ,即为无线电信号的到达角度。这里,信号发射装置可以是路由器,基站等等,本申请对此不作限定。无线电信号可以是蜂窝移动信号、蓝牙信号、Wi-Fi(wireless fidelity,无线保真)信号、UWB(Ultra-wideband,超宽频)信号等等,此处不作限定。In this embodiment of the present application, the angle of arrival may refer to the angle formed between the signal transmitted by the signal transmitting device and the antenna in the electronic device, which is called the angle of arrival, and may also be called the angle of incidence. As shown in Figure 1, the angle θ formed by the radio signal and antenna 1 and antenna 2 is the arrival angle of the radio signal. Here, the signal transmitting device may be a router, a base station, etc., which is not limited in this application. The radio signal may be a cellular mobile signal, a Bluetooth signal, a Wi-Fi (wireless fidelity, wireless fidelity) signal, a UWB (Ultra-wideband, ultra-wideband) signal, etc., which are not limited here.
在本申请实施例中,信号的到达角度又可以称为信号的来波方向。In the embodiment of the present application, the angle of arrival of the signal may also be referred to as the direction of arrival of the signal.
2、天线场型(radiation pattern)2. Radiation pattern
在本申请实施例中,天线场型是指在离天线一定距离处,辐射场的相对场强(归一化模值)随方向变化情况。天线场型通常使用天线辐射方向图进行描述,天线辐射方向图又称天线方向图和远场方向图,天线辐射方向图用于表征天线辐射特性(场强振幅、相位、极化)与空间角度关系的图形。不同天线场型对应不同的天线场型状态,不同天线场型状态的天线的辐射场的相对场强随方向变化情况不同。In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna pattern refers to the variation of the relative field strength (normalized modulus) of the radiation field with the direction at a certain distance from the antenna. The antenna pattern is usually described by the antenna radiation pattern. The antenna radiation pattern is also called the antenna pattern and the far field pattern. The antenna radiation pattern is used to characterize the antenna radiation characteristics (field strength amplitude, phase, polarization) and space angle Graphics of relationships. Different antenna patterns correspond to different antenna pattern states, and the relative field strengths of the radiation fields of antennas in different antenna pattern states vary with directions.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备可以有定位功能。当用户使用电子设备中的定位功能(例如点开地图应用)时,电子设备可以通过AOA定位算法得到定位结果。电子设备估算出的信号到达角度越准确,电子设备利用到达角度计算出的定位结果也就越准确。电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、个人电脑等具有两个或多于两个天线的智能设备,本申请实施例中对电子设备的具体类型不作特殊限制。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device may have a positioning function. When a user uses a positioning function in an electronic device (for example, clicks on a map application), the electronic device can obtain a positioning result through an AOA positioning algorithm. The more accurate the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device is, the more accurate the positioning result calculated by the electronic device using the angle of arrival is. The electronic device may be a smart device with two or more antennas, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, and a personal computer, and the specific type of the electronic device is not particularly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可以理解的是,电子设备也可以具有寻物功能或确定其他设备方向的功能。电子设备可以通过AOA估计确定出所寻物体的方向,或者通过AOA估计确定出其他电子设备的方向,此处不作限定。It can be understood that the electronic device may also have an object finding function or a function of determining the direction of other devices. The electronic device may determine the direction of the object it is looking for through the AOA estimation, or determine the direction of other electronic devices through the AOA estimation, which is not limited herein.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备可以存储有天线间相位差和信号到达角度的映射关系表。当电子设备进行信号的到达角度估算时,电子设备可以确定接收该信号时天线间的相位差。然后,电子设备将相位差与映射关系表中的相位差进行匹配,映射关系表中与该相位差匹配的相位差对应的到达角度即为到达角度的估算结果。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device may store a mapping relationship table between phase differences between antennas and signal arrival angles. When the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, the electronic device can determine the phase difference between the antennas when the signal is received. Then, the electronic device matches the phase difference with the phase difference in the mapping relationship table, and the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference matched with the phase difference in the mapping relationship table is the estimated result of the angle of arrival.
这里,电子设备可以存储有特定天线场型状态的天线间相位差和信号到达角度的映射关系表。Here, the electronic device may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between antennas and the signal arrival angle of a specific antenna pattern state.
举例来说,如图2所示,图2中电子设备100中存在3个天线:天线1、天线2、天线3,电子设备可以建立天线1和天线2的相位差PD1以及天线1与天线3的相位差PD2与信号的到达角度的映射关系表。For example, as shown in FIG. 2, there are three antennas in the electronic device 100 in FIG. 2: antenna 1, antenna 2, and antenna 3. The electronic device can establish the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3. The mapping relationship between the phase difference PD2 and the arrival angle of the signal.
表1Table 1
到达角度angle of arrival 359°359°
天线1与天线2的相位差(PD1)Phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 2 (PD1) A(0°)A(0°) A(1°)A(1°) A(2°)A(2°) A(359°)A(359°)
天线1与天线3的相位差(PD2)Phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3 (PD2) B(0°)B(0°) B(1°)B(1°) B(2°)B(2°) B(359°)B(359°)
表1为电子设备中天线间的相位差与接收到的信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。表1中展示了信号的到达角度分别为0°到359°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1以及天线1与天线3的相位差PD2。如表1所示,当电子设备接收到的信号的到达角度为0°时,电子设备的天线1与天线2接收到该信号的相位差PD1为A(0°),天线1与天线3接收到该信号的相位差PD2为B(0°)。当电子设备接收到的信号的到达角度为1°时,电子设备的天线1与天线2接收到该信号的相位差PD1为A(1°),天线1与天线3接收到该信号的相位差PD2为B(1°)。当电子设备接收到的信号的到达角度为2°时,电子设备的天线1与天线2接收到该信号的相位差PD1为A(2°),天线1与天线3接收到该信号的相位差PD2为 B(2°)。当电子设备接收到的信号的到达角度为359°时,电子设备的天线1与天线2接收到该信号的相位差PD1为A(359°),天线1与天线3接收到该信号的相位差PD2为B(359°)。Table 1 is a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between antennas in the electronic device and the angle of arrival of the received signal. Table 1 shows the phase difference PD1 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when the angle of arrival of the signal is 0° to 359° respectively. As shown in Table 1, when the angle of arrival of the signal received by the electronic device is 0°, the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (0°), and the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 receive The phase difference PD2 to this signal is B(0°). When the arrival angle of the signal received by the electronic device is 1°, the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (1°), and the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B(1°). When the angle of arrival of the signal received by the electronic device is 2°, the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (2°), and the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B(2°). When the angle of arrival of the signal received by the electronic device is 359°, the phase difference PD1 of the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 of the electronic device is A (359°), and the phase difference between the signal received by the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 PD2 is B (359°).
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000001
表2为电子设备在一种天线场型状态下的天线间的相位差与接收到的信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。表2中,信号的实际到达角度为210°,该到达角度对应的相位差为1.2°,然而相位差为1.2°对应了三个到达角度:210°、150°和60°,这样,当信号真实的到达角度为210°时,电子设备可能会根据相位差估计出的到达角度为150°或60°。Table 2 is a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the received signal of the electronic device in one antenna pattern state. In Table 2, the actual arrival angle of the signal is 210°, and the phase difference corresponding to this arrival angle is 1.2°. However, the phase difference of 1.2° corresponds to three arrival angles: 210°, 150° and 60°. In this way, when the signal When the real angle of arrival is 210°, the electronic device may estimate the angle of arrival to be 150° or 60° according to the phase difference.
因此,电子设备仅通过天线间的相位差以及相位差与到达角度的映像关系来确定信号的到达角度,可能会出现同一个相位差值,对应多个到达角度的情况。这样,可能会导致电子设备估计出的到达角度不准确。Therefore, the electronic device only determines the angle of arrival of the signal through the phase difference between the antennas and the image relationship between the phase difference and the angle of arrival. It may appear that the same phase difference value corresponds to multiple angles of arrival. In this way, the angle of arrival estimated by the electronic device may be inaccurate.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000002
表3为电子设备在两种天线场型状态下的天线间的相位差与接收到的信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。虽然每种天线场型状态下均具有相同相位差对应多个到达角度的情况,第一天线场型状态下相位差为1.2°对应三个到达角度:60°、150°及210°;第二天线场型状态下相位差为2.7°对应三个到达角度:100°、210°及350°;若在第一天线场型状态下计算得到天线1与天线2的相位差(PD1)为1.2°,在第二天线场型状态下计算得到天线1与天线2的相位差(PD1)为2.7°,依据两种天线场型状态的相位差和映像关系表(例如表3),可唯一确定真实的到达角度为210°。Table 3 is a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the received signal of the electronic device in two antenna pattern states. Although each antenna pattern state has the same phase difference corresponding to multiple arrival angles, the first antenna pattern state has a phase difference of 1.2° corresponding to three arrival angles: 60°, 150° and 210°; the second The phase difference of 2.7° in the antenna pattern state corresponds to three arrival angles: 100°, 210° and 350°; if the calculated phase difference (PD1) between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is 1.2° in the first antenna pattern state , the phase difference (PD1) between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is calculated to be 2.7° under the second antenna pattern state, and the real The angle of arrival is 210°.
为了提高电子设备估计得到信号的到达角度的准确率,本申请实施例提供了一种信号到达角度估计方法,该方法可以包括:电子设备具有天线单元,天线单元包括至少两根天线,电子设备通过天线接收无线电信号,电子设备中存储有在天线场型状态集合下天线单元中天线间相位差与信号到达角度的映射关系表,天线场型状态集合包括至少两种天线场型状态;电子设备在接收该无线电信号时确定天线单元处于第一天线场型状态,确定第一天线场型状态下天线单元的第一相位差,获取第一天线场型状态下的天线间相位差与信号到达角度的第一映射关系表,匹配第一相位差和第一映射关系表,确定第一相位差对应的第一信号到达角度集合,该第一信号到达角度集合包括至少两个信号到达角度;将天线单元从第一天线场型状态切换至第二天线场型状态,确定第二天线场型状态下的天线单元的天线间的第二相位差,获取第二天线场型状态下天线间的相位差与信号到达角度的第二映射关系表,匹配第二相位 差和第二映射关系表,确定第二相位差对应的第二到达角度集合;由于在第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的接收的信号真实的到达角度不变,第一到达角度集合和第二到达角度集合相重合的到达角度即为真实的到达角度。In order to improve the accuracy of the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of the signal, which may include: the electronic device has an antenna unit, and the antenna unit includes at least two antennas, and the electronic device passes The antenna receives radio signals, and the electronic device stores a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas in the antenna unit and the signal arrival angle under the antenna field state set. The antenna field state set includes at least two antenna field states; the electronic device is in When receiving the radio signal, determine that the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state, determine the first phase difference of the antenna unit in the first antenna pattern state, and obtain the phase difference between the antennas in the first antenna pattern state and the signal arrival angle The first mapping relationship table, matching the first phase difference and the first mapping relationship table, determining a first signal arrival angle set corresponding to the first phase difference, the first signal arrival angle set includes at least two signal arrival angles; the antenna unit Switch from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state, determine the second phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit in the second antenna pattern state, and obtain the phase difference between the antennas and the second antenna pattern state. The second mapping relationship table of the signal arrival angle matches the second phase difference and the second mapping relationship table to determine the second arrival angle set corresponding to the second phase difference; since the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state The real angle of arrival of the received signal in the state remains unchanged, and the angle of arrival at which the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles overlap is the real angle of arrival.
当然,若第一到达角度集合和第二到达角度集合相互重合的到达角度的数量大于一个,电子设备还用于将天线单元从第二天线场型状态切换至第三天线场型状态,并循环以上步骤,直至多个到达角度集合相重合的到达角度的数量为一个。Of course, if the number of angles of arrival in which the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles overlap each other is greater than one, the electronic device is also used to switch the antenna unit from the second antenna pattern state to the third antenna pattern state, and loop In the above steps, until the number of arrival angles that coincide with the multiple arrival angle sets is one.
本申请的实施例中,电子设备中存储的天线场型状态下的相位差与到达角度之间的映射关系表可为一个,即天线场型状态集合下的所有天线场型状态对应的相位差与到达角度均位于同一个映射关系表中;电子设备中存储的天线场型状态下的相位差与到达角度之间的映射关系表可为多个,即天线场型状态集合下的每种天线场型状态对应的相位差与到达角度位于一个映射关系表中。In the embodiment of the present application, the mapping relationship between the phase difference and the angle of arrival stored in the electronic device may be one, that is, the phase difference corresponding to all the antenna pattern states under the antenna pattern state set and the angle of arrival are located in the same mapping relationship table; the mapping relationship table between the phase difference and the angle of arrival under the antenna pattern state stored in the electronic device can be multiple, that is, each antenna under the antenna pattern state set The phase difference and arrival angle corresponding to the field state are located in a mapping relationship table.
本申请实施例中的电子设备的天线单元可以具有两个天线、或者三个天线、或者四个天线,或者更多的天线,此处不作限度。本申请实施例将以电子设备具有三个天线为例进行阐述。如图2所示,图2示例性地示出了3天线的电子设备的示意图。图2中的电子设备100可以具有天线1、天线2和天线3共3个天线。可以理解的是,本申请实施例对天线在电子设备中的放置位置、以及天线的具体形状、种类等等均不作限定。The antenna unit of the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may have two antennas, or three antennas, or four antennas, or more antennas, which is not limited here. The embodiment of the present application will be described by taking an electronic device having three antennas as an example. As shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an electronic device with 3 antennas. The electronic device 100 in FIG. 2 may have three antennas: antenna 1 , antenna 2 and antenna 3 . It can be understood that, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the placement position of the antenna in the electronic device, and the specific shape, type, and the like of the antenna.
无线信号的到达角度固定时,电子设备的天线单元在不同的天线场型状态下,天线单元的辐射场的相对场强随方向变化不同,该到达角度对应的天线间的相位差也不同。即可通过切换天线单元的天线场型状态,以改变天线间的相位差。When the angle of arrival of the wireless signal is fixed, the antenna unit of the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, the relative field strength of the radiation field of the antenna unit varies with the direction, and the phase difference between the antennas corresponding to the angle of arrival is also different. That is, the phase difference between the antennas can be changed by switching the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit.
因此,电子设备可以利用不同天线场型状态的相位差来估计信号的到达角度。这样,可以提升AOA估算准确率。Therefore, the electronic device can use the phase difference of different antenna pattern states to estimate the angle of arrival of the signal. In this way, the accuracy of AOA estimation can be improved.
在电子设备估计信号的到达角度之前,电子设备中可以存储有天线单元在天线场型状态集合下的天线间的相位差与信号到达角度的映射关系表。如图3所示,信号发射器300可以在手机200的不同方向发射信号。手机200可以记录下接收不同来波方向的信号时,天线间的相位差。具体过程可以参考图4,图4示例性地示出的手机200在天线场型状态集合下建立天线间的相位差与信号的到达角度的映射关系表的具体流程。Before the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, the electronic device may store a mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit under the set of antenna pattern states and the angle of arrival of the signal. As shown in FIG. 3 , the signal transmitter 300 can transmit signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200 . The mobile phone 200 can record the phase difference between the antennas when receiving signals from different directions of arrival. For the specific process, refer to FIG. 4 , which exemplarily shows the specific process of the mobile phone 200 establishing a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the signal under the set of antenna pattern states.
如图4所示,手机200建立天线单元的天线场型状态集合下天线间的相位差与信号到达角度的映射关系表可以包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 4 , the mobile phone 200 establishes the mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the signal arrival angle under the antenna field state set of the antenna unit may include the following steps:
S401、信号发射器300放置在手机200的不同方向,持续发射无线电信号。S401. The signal transmitter 300 is placed in different directions of the mobile phone 200 to continuously transmit radio signals.
S402、手机200通过天线1、天线2、天线3接收信号发射器300发送的无线电信号。S402. The mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal sent by the signal transmitter 300 through the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , and the antenna 3 .
如图3所示,信号发射器300可以放置在手机200的不同方向,持续发射无线电信号。手机200可以通过天线1、天线2、天线3接收信号发射器300发送的无线电信号。As shown in FIG. 3 , the signal transmitter 300 can be placed in different directions of the mobile phone 200 to continuously transmit radio signals. The mobile phone 200 can receive the radio signal sent by the signal transmitter 300 through the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 and the antenna 3 .
S403、接收不同方向的无线电信号时,手机200计算并存储当前的天线场型状态下天线1与天线2的相位差PD1,天线1与天线3的相位差PD2以及对应的无线电信号的到达角度θ。S403. When receiving radio signals from different directions, the mobile phone 200 calculates and stores the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2, the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3, and the corresponding arrival angle θ of the radio signal under the current antenna pattern state .
手机200首先确定当前的天线场型状态,在当前的天线场型状态下,当信号发射器300置于手机200的0°方向时,手机200接收该信号发射器300发射的无线电信号。手机200可以计算接收该0°方向的无线电信号时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1(0°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2(0°)。当信号发射置于手机200的1°方向时,手机200接收该信号发射器300 发射的无线电信号。手机200可以计算出接收该1°方向的无线电信号时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1(1°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2(1°)。依次地,信号发射器300在手机200的不同方向发射无线电信号。这里,通过调整信号发射器300发射无线电信号的发射角度,以调整无线电信号的到达角度θ,信号发射器300每次调整1°,可以理解,在其他实施例中,信号发射器200发射角度的调整大小可为0.1°、0.5°等,即发射角度的调整大小可依据实际场景确定,这里不作特殊限定。The mobile phone 200 first determines the current antenna pattern state. Under the current antenna pattern state, when the signal transmitter 300 is placed in the 0° direction of the mobile phone 200, the mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal transmitted by the signal transmitter 300. The mobile phone 200 can calculate the phase difference PD1 (0°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 (0°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when receiving the radio signal in the 0° direction. When the signal transmitter is placed in a 1° direction of the mobile phone 200 , the mobile phone 200 receives the radio signal transmitted by the signal transmitter 300 . The mobile phone 200 can calculate the phase difference PD1 (1°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 (1°) between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when receiving the radio signal in the 1° direction. In turn, the signal transmitter 300 transmits radio signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200 . Here, by adjusting the transmission angle of the radio signal transmitted by the signal transmitter 300 to adjust the arrival angle θ of the radio signal, the signal transmitter 300 adjusts 1° each time. It can be understood that in other embodiments, the signal transmitter 200 transmits the angle of The adjustment size can be 0.1°, 0.5°, etc., that is, the adjustment size of the emission angle can be determined according to the actual scene, and there is no special limitation here.
这里,信号发射器300可以在与手机200相同的平面发射无线电信号。信号发射器300在手机200的不同方向发射无线电信号时,信号发射器300仍然与手机200处于相同的平面。这时,无线电信号的到达角度可以是平面夹角。可以理解的是,信号发射器300可以与手机200在不同的平面。这时,无线电信号的到达角度可以是空间夹角,即该空间夹角可以包括无线电信号与手机200中天线构成的方位角(azimuth),俯仰角(pitch)以及翻滚角(Roll)。Here, the signal transmitter 300 may transmit radio signals on the same plane as the mobile phone 200 . When the signal transmitter 300 transmits radio signals in different directions of the mobile phone 200, the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are still in the same plane. At this time, the arrival angle of the radio signal may be an included angle between planes. It can be understood that the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 may be on different planes. At this time, the angle of arrival of the radio signal may be a spatial angle, that is, the spatial angle may include an azimuth, a pitch, and a roll formed between the radio signal and the antenna in the mobile phone 200 .
S404、判断手机200是否完成接收所有方向的无线电信号,并存储所有来波方向对应的天线1与天线2的相位差PD1、天线1与天线3的相位差PD2。S404. Determine whether the mobile phone 200 has received radio signals from all directions, and store the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 corresponding to all directions of incoming waves.
若手机200完成接收所有方向的无线电信号,并存储所有来波方向对应的相位差PD1、PD2。则手机200可以执行步骤S405。反之,则信号发射器300执行步骤S401。If the mobile phone 200 finishes receiving radio signals from all directions, and stores the phase differences PD1 and PD2 corresponding to all directions of incoming waves. Then the mobile phone 200 can execute step S405. Otherwise, the signal transmitter 300 executes step S401.
本申请实施例以信号发射器300与手机200在一个平面为例进行阐述。信号发射器300可以以手机200为中心,在距离手机200预设距离的圆周上间隔预设角度α持续发射无线电信号。该预设角度α可以是1°,也可以是2°,也可以5°,此处对预设角度α不作限定。The embodiment of the present application is described by taking the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 on the same plane as an example. The signal transmitter 300 can take the mobile phone 200 as the center, and continuously transmit radio signals at intervals of a preset angle α on a circle with a preset distance from the mobile phone 200 . The preset angle α may be 1°, 2°, or 5°, and the preset angle α is not limited here.
S405、手机200建立并存储当前的天线场型状态、天线间相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表。S405. The mobile phone 200 establishes and stores the current antenna pattern state, a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
当手机200存储所有来波方向对应的天线1与天线2的相位差PD1,天线1与天线3的相位差PD2后,手机200可以建立天线单元的天线场型状态、天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表。After the mobile phone 200 stores the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 corresponding to all incoming wave directions, the mobile phone 200 can establish the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, the phase difference between the antennas and the radio The mapping relationship table of the angle of arrival of the signal.
该映射关系表可以记录信号发射器300与手机200在一个平面,无线电信号的到达角度间隔预设角度α时,分别对应的天线1与天线2的相位差PD1,天线1与天线3的相位差PD2。该映射关系表也可以记录信号发射器300与手机200不在同一平面,无线电信号的到达角度间隔预设角度β时,分别对应的天线1与天线2的相位差PD1,天线1与天线3的相位差PD2。The mapping relationship table can record the phase difference PD1 between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2, and the phase difference between the antenna 1 and the antenna 3 when the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are on the same plane, and the arrival angle of the radio signal is separated by a preset angle α. PD2. The mapping relationship table can also record that the signal transmitter 300 and the mobile phone 200 are not on the same plane, and when the angle of arrival of the radio signal is separated by a preset angle β, the corresponding phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2, and the phase between antenna 1 and antenna 3 Poor PD2.
S406、判断手机200是否建立并存储天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态对应的映像关系表。S406. Determine whether the mobile phone 200 has established and stored an image relationship table corresponding to all antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
若手机200存储天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态对应的映像关系表,则流程结束。若手机200未存储天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态对应的映像关系表,执行步骤S407。If the mobile phone 200 stores the mapping relationship tables corresponding to all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set, the process ends. If the mobile phone 200 does not store mapping relationship tables corresponding to all antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set, step S407 is executed.
S407、确定手机200中未存储对应的映射关系表的天线场型状态,切换手机200至该天线场型状态。然后步骤跳转至S401。S407. Determine the antenna pattern state for which no corresponding mapping relationship table is stored in the mobile phone 200, and switch the mobile phone 200 to the antenna pattern state. Then the step jumps to S401.
手机200匹配天线场型状态集合中的所有天线场型状态是否均建立对应的映射关系表,若天线场型状态集合中的至少一个天线场型状态对应的映射关系表未建立,或已经建立的映射关系表中没有天线场型状态集合中的至少一个天线场型状态,则表示该至少一个天线场型状态下的天线间的相位差和到达角度未进行测量和计算,可通过将手机切换至其中一个天线场型状态,并重复执行步骤S401至S405,以完成天线场型状态集合中所有的天线场型状态 下的相位差和到达角度的测量或计算。Whether the mobile phone 200 matches all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set to establish a corresponding mapping relationship table, if the mapping relationship table corresponding to at least one antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set has not been established, or has been established If there is no at least one antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set in the mapping relationship table, it means that the phase difference and angle of arrival between the antennas in the at least one antenna pattern state have not been measured and calculated, and the mobile phone can be switched to One of the antenna pattern states, and repeatedly execute steps S401 to S405 to complete the measurement or calculation of the phase difference and the angle of arrival under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
这样,循环执行以上步骤,直至手机中建立并存储天线场型状态集合中所有的天线场型状态对应的映射关系表。In this way, the above steps are cyclically executed until the mapping relationship tables corresponding to all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set are established and stored in the mobile phone.
示例性的,天线场型状态集合包括第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态,手机200建立的第一天线场型状态下,天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表可以如下表4所示。Exemplarily, the antenna pattern state set includes a first antenna pattern state and a second antenna pattern state, and in the first antenna pattern state established by the mobile phone 200, the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal The table may be shown in Table 4 below.
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000003
如表4所示,该表4中记录了在第一天线场型状态下,无线电信号从0°-359°共360个角度时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1和天线1与天线3的相位差PD2。在第一天线场型状态下,当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为0°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为E(0°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为F(0°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为1°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为E(1°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为F(1°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为2°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为E(2°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为F(2°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为359°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为E(359°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为F(359°)。As shown in Table 4, this table 4 records the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3 when the radio signal has a total of 360 angles from 0 ° to 359 ° under the first antenna pattern state. The phase difference PD2. In the first antenna pattern state, when the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 0°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E (0°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(0°). When the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 1°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E(1°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(1°). When the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 2°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E(2°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F(2°). When the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 359°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is E (359°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is F (359°).
示例性的,手机200在第二天线场型状态下建立的天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表可以如下表5所示。Exemplarily, the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal established by the mobile phone 200 in the second antenna pattern state may be shown in Table 5 below.
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000004
如表5所示,该表5中记录了在第二天线场型状态下,无线电信号从0°-359°共360个角度时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD3,天线1与天线3的相位差PD4。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为0°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD3为G(0°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为H(0°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为1°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为G(1°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为H(1°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为2°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为G(2°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为H(2°)。当手机200接收的无线电信号的到达角度为359°时,天线1与天线2的相位差PD1为G(359°);天线1与天线3的相位差PD2为H(359°)。As shown in Table 5, this table 5 records the phase difference PD3 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 when the radio signal has a total of 360 angles from 0° to 359° under the second antenna pattern state, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3 The phase difference PD4. When the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 0°, the phase difference PD3 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G(0°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H(0°). When the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 1°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G (1°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H (1°). When the arrival angle of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 2°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G(2°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H(2°). When the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the mobile phone 200 is 359°, the phase difference PD1 between antenna 1 and antenna 2 is G (359°); the phase difference PD2 between antenna 1 and antenna 3 is H (359°).
可以理解的是,手机200中存储的映射关系表可以不限于表4中示出的映像关系表以及表5中示出的映像关系表。例如,手机200中还可以存储有无线电信号的到达角度的俯仰角不同时,该场型状态、到达角度与手机200的天线间的相位差的映射关系表也不相同。本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the mapping relationship tables stored in the mobile phone 200 may not be limited to the mapping relationship tables shown in Table 4 and the mapping relationship tables shown in Table 5. For example, when the angle of arrival and pitch angle of the radio signal are different, the mapping relationship table between the field state, the angle of arrival and the phase difference between the antennas of the mobile phone 200 may also be stored in the mobile phone 200 . This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
可选地,手机200中可以将第一天线场型状态对应的映射关系表和第二天线场型状态对应的映射关系表同时存储在一个表格中。例如,上述表4和表5可以存储在同一个表格中。此处不作限定。Optionally, the mobile phone 200 may simultaneously store the mapping relationship table corresponding to the first antenna pattern state and the mapping relationship table corresponding to the second antenna pattern state in one table. For example, the above Table 4 and Table 5 can be stored in the same table. It is not limited here.
可选地,手机200可以将手机200建立的天线场型状态集合中天线场型状态对应的映射关系表存储在云服务器或服务器中,此处不作限定。Optionally, the mobile phone 200 may store the mapping relationship table corresponding to the antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set established by the mobile phone 200 in the cloud server or server, which is not limited here.
可以理解的是,手机200可以有天线1和天线2共两个天线。手机200中可以存储有天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态下天线1与天线2的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。It can be understood that the mobile phone 200 may have two antennas, namely antenna 1 and antenna 2 . The mobile phone 200 may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set.
可以理解的是,手机200可以具有天线1、天线2、天线3以及天线4共4个天线。手机200中可以存储有天线场型状态集合中天线场型状态下天线1与天线2之间的相位差,天线1与天线3之间的相位差,以及天线1与天线4之间的相位差,与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。该映像关系表中可以存储有在天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态下,无线电信号不同的到达角度,分别对应的天线1与天线2之间的相位差,天线1与天线3之间的相位差,以及天线1与天线4之间的相位差。It can be understood that the mobile phone 200 may have four antennas including antenna 1 , antenna 2 , antenna 3 and antenna 4 . The mobile phone 200 can store the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 2, the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 4 under the antenna pattern state in the antenna pattern state set. , and the mapping relationship table between the angle of arrival of the radio signal. The image relationship table can store the different arrival angles of radio signals under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set, the corresponding phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 2, and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 3. , and the phase difference between antenna 1 and antenna 4.
可以理解的是,手机200中可以具有多N个天线,N大于4。手机200中可以存储有天线场型状态集合中所有天线场型状态下,N个天线中任一天线与其他天线间的相位差,与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表。该映射关系表中可以存储有无线电信号不同的到达角度,对应的N个天线中任一天线与其他天线间的相位差。It can be understood that the mobile phone 200 may have more than N antennas, and N is greater than 4. The mobile phone 200 may store a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between any antenna of the N antennas and other antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under all the antenna pattern states in the antenna pattern state set. The mapping relationship table may store different arrival angles of radio signals, and corresponding phase differences between any one of the N antennas and other antennas.
可以理解的是,手机200在建立在天线场型状态集合中天线场型状态下天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表时,手机200可以处于固定位置,可以通过改变信号发射器300的位置来改变该信号发射器300发射的无线电信号到达手机200中天线的角度。信号发射器300也可以处于固定位置,可以通过改变手机200的位置来改变手机200中天线接收无线电信号的到达角度。本申请实施例对此不作限定。天线场型用于表征天线的辐射场的相对场强随方向变化情况,可以理解,电子设备的天线单元处于不同的天线场型状态,天线对应的辐射场的相对场强随方向变化的情况也相应变化,进而导致天线单元的天线间的相位差相应发生变化。可通过天线调制技术改变天线单元的天线场型状态,该天线调制技术包括改变天线单元的馈点和接地点等方式,以实现不同天线场型状态的切换。It can be understood that when the mobile phone 200 establishes the mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under the antenna pattern state set in the antenna pattern state set, the mobile phone 200 can be in a fixed position, and can be changed by changing The position of the signal transmitter 300 is used to change the angle at which the radio signal emitted by the signal transmitter 300 reaches the antenna in the mobile phone 200 . The signal transmitter 300 can also be in a fixed position, and the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the antenna in the mobile phone 200 can be changed by changing the position of the mobile phone 200 . This embodiment of the present application does not limit it. The antenna pattern is used to represent the relative field strength of the radiation field of the antenna changing with the direction. It can be understood that the antenna unit of the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, and the relative field strength of the radiation field corresponding to the antenna changes with the direction. The phase difference between the antennas of the antenna unit changes accordingly. The antenna pattern state of the antenna unit can be changed through the antenna modulation technology, which includes changing the feed point and ground point of the antenna unit, etc., so as to realize the switching of different antenna pattern states.
示例性地,请参见图5A和图5B,图5A和图5B示意电子设备的天线单元的两种天线场型状态的切换示意图。图5A和图5B所示的电子设备600具有天线单元610,天线单元610具有3个天线:第一天线612、第二天线614和第三天线616,第一天线612具有第一馈点612A和第二馈点612B,第一馈点612A和第二馈点612B分别位于第一天线612的相邻两侧;第二天线614具有第三馈点614A和第四馈点614B,第三馈点614A和第四馈点614B分别位于第二天线614的相邻两侧,第三天线616具有第五馈点616A和第六馈点616B,第五馈点616A和第六馈点616B分别位于第三天线616的相邻两侧。For example, please refer to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B . FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are schematic diagrams illustrating switching between two antenna pattern states of an antenna unit of an electronic device. The electronic device 600 shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B has an antenna unit 610, and the antenna unit 610 has three antennas: a first antenna 612, a second antenna 614 and a third antenna 616, and the first antenna 612 has a first feed point 612A and The second feed point 612B, the first feed point 612A and the second feed point 612B are respectively located on the adjacent two sides of the first antenna 612; the second antenna 614 has a third feed point 614A and a fourth feed point 614B, the third feed point 614A and the fourth feed point 614B are respectively located on the adjacent two sides of the second antenna 614, the third antenna 616 has a fifth feed point 616A and a sixth feed point 616B, and the fifth feed point 616A and the sixth feed point 616B are respectively located at the second antenna 614 Adjacent two sides of the three antennas 616 .
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第一馈点612A电连接第一天线612,通过第三馈点614A电连接第二天线614,通过第五馈点616A电连接第三天线616;此时,电子设备600的天线单元610处于第一天线场型状态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the first feed point 612A, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the third feed point 614A, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fifth feed point 616A The third antenna 616; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the first antenna pattern state.
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第二馈点612B电连接第一天线612,通过第四馈点614B电连接第二天线614,通过第六馈点616B电连接第三天线616;此时, 电子设备600的天线单元610处于第二天线场型状态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the second feed point 612B, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fourth feed point 614B, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the sixth feed point 616B The third antenna 616; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the second antenna pattern state.
其中,图6A为第一天线612在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位;在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种天线场型状态的第一天线612的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别,该水平面的角度区间包括:[1°,12°]、[16°,46°]、[54°,80°]等。Wherein, FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna 612 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane; In some angle intervals of the horizontal plane, the phases of the first antenna 612 of the two antenna pattern states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane, and the angle intervals of the horizontal plane include: [1°, 12°], [16° , 46°], [54°, 80°], etc.
图6B为第二天线614在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位;在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种天线场型状态的第二天线614的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别,该水平面的角度区间包括:[3°,18°]、[20°,46°]、[48°,92°]°等。Figure 6B is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna 614 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state, in which the abscissa represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane; in some horizontal planes In the angle interval of , the phases of the second antenna 614 of the two antenna pattern states have obvious differences at the angle of the same horizontal plane, and the angle interval of the horizontal plane includes: [3°, 18°], [20°, 46° °], [48°, 92°]°, etc.
图6C为第三天线616在第一天线场型状态和第二天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位,在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种场型状态的第三天线616的相位在相同的来波方向下具有很明显区别,该水平面的角度区间包括:[2°,18°]、[20°,46°]、[48°,92°]等。FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna 616 in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane. In some horizontal planes In the angular range of the horizontal plane, the phases of the third antenna 616 in the two field states have obvious differences in the same incoming wave direction, and the angular range of the horizontal plane includes: [2°, 18°], [20°, 46° ], [48°, 92°], etc.
这样,从图6A、图6B和图6C可以看出,电子设备600的天线单元610处于不同天线场型状态下,三个天线的相位存在明显的区别。In this way, it can be seen from FIG. 6A , FIG. 6B and FIG. 6C that when the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in different antenna pattern states, there are obvious differences in the phases of the three antennas.
图7A中实线为依据图1中公式计算得到的第一天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第一天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差;In Fig. 7A, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the first antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. The phase difference between 612 and the second antenna 614;
图7B中实线为依据图1中公式计算得到的第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差的示意图,虚线为实际测量得到的第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差;The solid line in FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 calculated according to the formula in FIG. The phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614;
由图7A和7B可知,实线和虚线具有不重合的部分,即依据图1公式得到天线间的理想状态下的相位差与实际的相位差之间存在差距。It can be seen from FIGS. 7A and 7B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
图7C为第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差,由图7C可知,在到达角度的范围在1°-360°之间,第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差的两条虚线仅相交一次,即仅在该相交点时第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差相同,在其他到达角度时第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差均不相同,因此,可以得出不同天线场型状态下的相位差具有明显的区别。FIG. 7C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 7C that the angle of arrival ranges from 1° to 360°. The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state intersect only once, that is, the phases under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state only at this intersection point The difference is the same, and the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state is different at other angles of arrival. Therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences under different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
图8A中实线为依据图1中公式计算得到的第一天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第一天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差;In Fig. 8A, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the first antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. The phase difference between 612 and the third antenna 616;
图8B中实线为依据图1中公式计算得到的第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差;The solid line in FIG. 8B is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 calculated according to the formula in FIG. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the second antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. The phase difference between 612 and the third antenna 616;
由图8A和8B可知,实线和虚线具有不重合的部分,即依据图1公式得到天线间的理想状态下的相位差与实际的相位差之间存在差距。It can be seen from FIGS. 8A and 8B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
图8C为第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,由图8C可知,在到达角度的范围在1°-360°之间,第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差的两条虚线仅在180°左右和220°左右各相交一次,即仅在两个相交点 时第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差相同,在其他到达角度时第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的相位差均不相同,因此,可以得出不同天线场型状态下的相位差具有明显的区别。FIG. 8C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 8C that the range of the angle of arrival is between 1°-360°, The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state only intersect once at about 180° and 220°, that is, only at two intersection points when the first antenna pattern state It is the same as the phase difference in the second antenna pattern state. At other angles of arrival, the phase difference in the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state are different. Therefore, different antenna pattern states can be obtained There is a clear difference in the phase difference below.
这样,通过切换天线的馈点,以改变电子设备的天线场型状态,且不同天线场型状态下的相同来波方向的天线间的相位差存在很明显的区别,通过计算不同天线场型状态的天线间的相位差,并依据该不同天线场型状态的天线间的相位差和映射关系表以确定无线电信号的真实的到达角度。进一步的,通过切换天线的馈点,使同一天线可产生多种不同的谐振,从而可以实现在不同使用需求下获得不同的频段,使得同一天线能够提供更广泛的频段;如此,通过切换天线的馈点,以使一根天线具有多根天线的功效。In this way, by switching the feed point of the antenna, the antenna pattern state of the electronic device is changed, and the phase difference between the antennas with the same incoming wave direction under different antenna pattern states is obviously different, by calculating the different antenna pattern states The phase difference between the antennas, and the real angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined according to the phase difference between the antennas of the different antenna pattern states and the mapping relationship table. Furthermore, by switching the feed point of the antenna, the same antenna can generate a variety of different resonances, so that different frequency bands can be obtained under different usage requirements, so that the same antenna can provide a wider frequency band; thus, by switching the antenna's feed point so that one antenna has the effect of multiple antennas.
请参见图9示意本申请一实施例中电子设备的天线单元的其中一个天线通过改变馈点以实现天线场型状态切换的示意图。Please refer to FIG. 9 , which is a schematic diagram illustrating that one of the antennas of the antenna unit of the electronic device in an embodiment of the present application realizes the switching of the antenna pattern state by changing the feed point.
电子设备900包括开关单元910和天线921,该天线921具有两个馈点:第一馈点921A和第二馈点921B,第一馈点921A和第二馈点921B分别位于天线的相邻侧,电子设备900可控制开关单元910的连接状态,其中,电子设备900可控制开关单元910,以使电子设备900通过第一馈点921A或第二馈点921B连接天线921,例如电子设备控制开关单元910,以使电子设备通过第一馈点连接天线921,天线单元处于第一天线场型状态;电子设备控制开关单元910,以使电子设备通过第二馈点连接天线921,天线单元处于第二天线场型状态。The electronic device 900 includes a switch unit 910 and an antenna 921, the antenna 921 has two feed points: a first feed point 921A and a second feed point 921B, and the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B are respectively located on adjacent sides of the antenna , the electronic device 900 can control the connection status of the switch unit 910, wherein the electronic device 900 can control the switch unit 910 so that the electronic device 900 can connect to the antenna 921 through the first feed point 921A or the second feed point 921B, for example, the electronic device controls the switch Unit 910, so that the electronic device is connected to the antenna 921 through the first feed point, and the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state; the electronic device controls the switch unit 910, so that the electronic device is connected to the antenna 921 through the second feed point, and the antenna unit is in the first antenna pattern state; Two antenna pattern states.
本申请实施例中,开关单元910为单刀双掷开关(single-pole double-throw,简称SP2T),电子设备可控制SP2T的连接状态,以使电子设备900通过第一馈点921A或第二馈点921B连接天线921,其中,电子设备900通过不同的馈点连接天线921,SP2T的连接状态不同。In the embodiment of the present application, the switch unit 910 is a single-pole double-throw switch (single-pole double-throw, referred to as SP2T), and the electronic device can control the connection state of SP2T, so that the electronic device 900 can pass through the first feed point 921A or the second feed point 921A. The point 921B is connected to the antenna 921, wherein the electronic device 900 is connected to the antenna 921 through different feed points, and the connection states of SP2T are different.
可以理解,在其他实施例中,第一馈点921A和第二馈点921B的位置可依据实际场景调整,例如第一馈点921A和第二馈点921B可分别位于天线921的相对两侧或同侧。进一步地,若天线的馈点大于两个,例如三个、四个或大于四个,则可通过更换开关单元910的类型并控制天线单元910的连接状态,以使电子设备可通过多个馈点中的一个连接天线,例如若天线具有三个馈点,则开关单元可为单刀三掷开关,电子设备控制单刀三掷开关的连接对应的馈点,以使电子设备通过该馈点连接天线。It can be understood that in other embodiments, the positions of the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B can be adjusted according to the actual scene, for example, the first feed point 921A and the second feed point 921B can be respectively located on opposite sides of the antenna 921 or same side. Further, if the feed point of the antenna is more than two, such as three, four or more than four, the electronic device can pass through multiple feed points by changing the type of the switch unit 910 and controlling the connection state of the antenna unit 910. One of the points is connected to the antenna. For example, if the antenna has three feed points, the switch unit can be a single-pole three-throw switch. .
在一些可选的实施例中,电子设备的每个天线具有至少两个接地点,至少两个接地点与对应天线的连接位置均不相同,电子设备通过开关单元控制至少两个接地点中一个接入点与天线的连接,通过控制每个天线连接的接地点,以使电子设备处于不同的天线场型状态。In some optional embodiments, each antenna of the electronic device has at least two grounding points, and the connection positions of the at least two grounding points and the corresponding antenna are different, and the electronic device controls one of the at least two grounding points through the switch unit. The connection between the access point and the antenna controls the ground point connected to each antenna so that the electronic equipment is in different antenna pattern states.
请参见图10A和图10B,图10A和图10B示意本申请另一实施例中天线场型状态的切换示意图,该实施例与图6A和图6B相类似,不同之处在于:Please refer to FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B. FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the switching of antenna pattern states in another embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, except that:
电子设备600还包括第四天线618,第四天线618具有第七馈点618A和第八馈点618B。The electronic device 600 further includes a fourth antenna 618 having a seventh feed point 618A and an eighth feed point 618B.
本申请实施例中,第一馈点612A和第二馈点612B分别位于第一天线612的相对两侧;第三馈点614A和第四馈点614B分别位于第二天线614的相对两侧;第五馈点616A和第六馈点616B分别位于第三天线的相对两侧,第七馈点618A和第八馈点618B分别位于第四天线618的相对两侧。In the embodiment of the present application, the first feed point 612A and the second feed point 612B are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna 612; the third feed point 614A and the fourth feed point 614B are respectively located on opposite sides of the second antenna 614; The fifth feed point 616A and the sixth feed point 616B are respectively located on opposite sides of the third antenna, and the seventh feed point 618A and the eighth feed point 618B are respectively located on opposite sides of the fourth antenna 618 .
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第一馈点612A电连接第一天线612,通过第三馈点614A电连接第二天线614,通过第五馈点616A电连接第三天线616,通过第七馈点618A电连接第四天线618;此时,电子设备600的天线单元610处于第三天线场型状 态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the first feed point 612A, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the third feed point 614A, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fifth feed point 616A The third antenna 616 is electrically connected to the fourth antenna 618 through the seventh feeding point 618A; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the third antenna pattern state.
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第二馈点612B电连接第一天线612,通过第四馈点614B电连接第二天线614,通过第六馈点616B电连接第三天线616,通过第八馈点618B电连接第四天线618;此时,电子设备600的天线单元610处于第四天线场型状态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the second feed point 612B, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fourth feed point 614B, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the sixth feed point 616B The third antenna 616 is electrically connected to the fourth antenna 618 through the eighth feeding point 618B; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the fourth antenna pattern state.
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第二馈点612A电连接第一天线612,通过第四馈点614B电连接第二天线614,通过第六馈点616A电连接第三天线616,通过第八馈点618B电连接第四天线618;此时,电子设备600的天线单元610处于第五天线场型状态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the second feed point 612A, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fourth feed point 614B, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the sixth feed point 616A The third antenna 616 is electrically connected to the fourth antenna 618 through the eighth feed point 618B; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the fifth antenna pattern state.
当电子设备600中一个或多个馈源中的一个馈源通过第二馈点612B电连接第一天线612,通过第四馈点614A电连接第二天线614,通过第六馈点616B电连接第三天线616,通过第八馈点618A电连接第四天线618;此时,电子设备600的天线单元610处于第六天线场型状态。When one of the one or more feed sources in the electronic device 600 is electrically connected to the first antenna 612 through the second feed point 612B, electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the fourth feed point 614A, and electrically connected to the second antenna 614 through the sixth feed point 616B The third antenna 616 is electrically connected to the fourth antenna 618 through the eighth feeding point 618A; at this time, the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in the sixth antenna pattern state.
可以理解,馈源接入对应天线的馈点的位置的改变会影响天线的场型,进而影响天线单元的天线场型状态,即通过改变电子设备中馈源与对应天线之间多个馈点中不同馈点的切换,即可实现天线单元的天线场型状态间的切换。进一步地,仅需改变电子设备中多个天线中至少一个天线与对应馈源之间的馈点的位置,即通过该天线的多个馈点中不同馈点的切换,即可实现天线单元的天线场型状态间的切换。It can be understood that the change of the position of the feed point where the feed source is connected to the corresponding antenna will affect the field pattern of the antenna, and then affect the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, that is, by changing the multiple feed points between the feed source and the corresponding antenna in the electronic device Switching between different feed points in the antenna can realize the switching between the antenna pattern states of the antenna unit. Further, only need to change the position of the feed point between at least one of the multiple antennas in the electronic device and the corresponding feed source, that is, through the switching of different feed points among the multiple feed points of the antenna, the antenna unit can be realized. Switch between antenna pattern states.
其中,图11A为第一天线612在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位,在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种场型状态的第一天线612的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别。Among them, FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the first antenna 612 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane. In some angle intervals of the horizontal plane, the phases of the first antenna 612 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
图11B为第二天线614在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位,在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种场型状态的第二天线614的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别。FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the phase comparison of the horizontal section of the second antenna 614 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane. In some horizontal planes In the angle range of , the phases of the second antenna 614 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
图11C为第三天线616在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位,在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种场型状态的第三天线616的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别等。FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the third antenna 616 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane. In some horizontal planes In the angular interval of , the phases of the third antenna 616 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
图11D为第四天线618在第三天线场型状态和第四天线场型状态的水平切面相位比较示意图,图中横坐标表示水平面的角度,纵坐标表示水平面的角度对应的相位,在一些水平面的角度区间内,两种场型状态的第四天线618的相位在相同的水平面的角度下具有很明显区别等。FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of phase comparison of the horizontal section of the fourth antenna 618 in the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. The abscissa in the figure represents the angle of the horizontal plane, and the ordinate represents the phase corresponding to the angle of the horizontal plane. In some horizontal planes In the angular range of , the phases of the fourth antenna 618 in the two field states have obvious differences at the same angle of the horizontal plane.
这样,从图11A、图11B、图11C及图11D可以看出,电子设备600的天线单元610处于不同天线场型状态下,四个天线的相位在一些水平面的角度区间内存在明显的区别。In this way, it can be seen from FIG. 11A, FIG. 11B, FIG. 11C and FIG. 11D that the antenna unit 610 of the electronic device 600 is in different antenna pattern states, and the phases of the four antennas are obviously different in some angle intervals of the horizontal plane.
图12A中实线为依据图1中公式计算得到的第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差;The solid line in Fig. 12A is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the third antenna pattern state calculated according to the formula in Fig. 1, and the dotted line is the first antenna under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement The phase difference between 612 and the second antenna 614;
图12B中实线为第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差;In Fig. 12B, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the fourth antenna pattern state, and the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
由图12A和12B可知,实线和虚线具有不重合的部分,即依据图1公式得到天线间的理想状态下的相位差与实际的相位差之间存在差距。It can be seen from FIGS. 12A and 12B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
图12C为第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第二天线614的相位差,由图12C可知,在到达角度的范围在1°-360°之间,第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差的两条虚线仅在190°左右相交一次,即仅在该相交点时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差相同,在其他到达角度时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差均不相同,因此,可以得出不同天线场型状态下的相位差具有明显的区别。FIG. 12C shows the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the second antenna 614 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state. It can be seen from FIG. 12C that the angle of arrival ranges from 1° to 360°. The two dotted lines of the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state only intersect once at about 190°, that is, only at this intersection point, the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The phase difference is the same under the antenna pattern state, and the phase difference under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different at other angles of arrival. Therefore, it can be concluded that the phase difference under different antenna pattern states has obvious difference.
图13A中实线为第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差;In Fig. 13A, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state, and the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
图13B中实线为第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差;In Fig. 13B, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the fourth antenna pattern state, and the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
由图13A和13B可知,实线和虚线具有不重合的部分,即依据图1公式得到天线间的理想状态下的相位差与实际的相位差之间存在差距。It can be seen from FIGS. 13A and 13B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
图13C为第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,由图13C可知,图12C为第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第三天线616的相位差,由图13C可知,在到达角度的范围在1°-360°之间,第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差的两条虚线仅在180°左右相交一次,即仅在该相交点时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差相同,在其他到达角度时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差均不相同,因此,可以得出不同天线场型状态下的相位差具有明显的区别。Figure 13C is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state, as can be seen from Figure 13C, Figure 12C is the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna phase difference The phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the third antenna 616 in the field pattern state can be seen from FIG. 13C. In the range of the angle of arrival between 1°-360°, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The two dotted lines of the phase difference below only intersect once at about 180°, that is, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state is the same only at this intersection point, and the third antenna pattern state at other angles of arrival. The phase differences in the antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different, therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences in different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
图14A中实线为第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第三天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差;In Fig. 14A, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state, and the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
图14B中实线为第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差,虚线为实际测量得到的第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差;In Fig. 14B, the solid line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the fourth antenna pattern state, and the dotted line is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the fourth antenna pattern state obtained by actual measurement. Difference;
由图14A和14B可知,实线和虚线具有不重合的部分,即依据图1公式得到天线间的理想状态下的相位差与实际的相位差之间存在差距。It can be seen from FIGS. 14A and 14B that the solid line and the dotted line have non-overlapping parts, that is, there is a gap between the phase difference between the antennas in an ideal state obtained according to the formula in FIG. 1 and the actual phase difference.
图14C为第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差,由图14C可知,图14C为第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下第一天线612和第四天线618的相位差,由图14C可知,在到达角度的范围在1°-360°之间,第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差的两条虚线仅在180°左右相交一次,即仅在该相交点时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差相同,在其他到达角度时第三天线场型状态下和第四天线场型状态下的相位差均不相同,因此,可以得出不同天线场型状态下的相位差具有明显的区别。Figure 14C is the phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 under the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state, as can be seen from Figure 14C, Figure 14C is the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna phase difference The phase difference between the first antenna 612 and the fourth antenna 618 in the field pattern state can be seen from FIG. 14C. When the angle of arrival ranges between 1°-360°, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state The two dotted lines of the phase difference below only intersect once at about 180°, that is, the phase difference between the third antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state is the same only at this intersection point, and the third antenna pattern state at other angles of arrival. The phase differences in the antenna pattern state and the fourth antenna pattern state are different, therefore, it can be concluded that the phase differences in different antenna pattern states are obviously different.
这样,通过切换天线的馈点,即将电子设备接入天线的馈点从一侧切换至相对一侧,以实现天线单元的天线场型状态的变化,两种天线场型状态下的相同来波方向的天线间的相位 差存在很明显的区别。In this way, by switching the feed point of the antenna, that is, switching the feed point of the electronic device connected to the antenna from one side to the opposite side, in order to realize the change of the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, the same incoming wave under the two antenna pattern states There is a clear difference in the phase difference between the antennas in the same direction.
可以理解的是,每个天线还可以具有3个、4个、5个或大于5个馈点,其中每个天线的多个馈点的位置均不相同,多个馈点可均匀间隔分布于对应天线的周侧,多个馈点也可仅分布于对应天线的同侧,当然,馈点的数量、多个馈点的分布位置还可依据实际需求进行设置。It can be understood that each antenna can also have 3, 4, 5 or more than 5 feed points, wherein the positions of the multiple feed points of each antenna are not the same, and the multiple feed points can be evenly spaced in the Corresponding to the peripheral side of the antenna, multiple feed points can also be distributed only on the same side of the corresponding antenna. Of course, the number of feed points and the distribution positions of the multiple feed points can also be set according to actual needs.
电子设备可通过切换馈源与多个馈点中的一个进行连接,以改变电子设备的天线单元的天线场型状态。可以理解,电子设备可同时改变所有天线的馈点,以变更天线单元的天线场型状态,还可以仅改变电子设备中多个天线中的至少一个天线的馈点,以变更天线单元的天线场型状态。The electronic device can be connected to one of the multiple feed points by switching the feed source, so as to change the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit of the electronic device. It can be understood that the electronic device can change the feed points of all antennas at the same time to change the antenna pattern state of the antenna unit, and can only change the feed point of at least one antenna among the multiple antennas in the electronic device to change the antenna field of the antenna unit. type state.
在本申请实施例中,天线1可以称为第一天线,天线2可以称为第二天线、天线3可以称为第三天线。In this embodiment of the present application, antenna 1 may be called a first antenna, antenna 2 may be called a second antenna, and antenna 3 may be called a third antenna.
本申请实施例提供一种信号到达角度估计方法,该方法可以包括:电子设备具有定位功能,当用户使用电子设备进行定位时,电子设备可以通过天线接收无线电信号S1,该电子设备中存储有不同场型状态下,天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表;电子设备可以计算第一天线场型状态下接收该无线电信号S1时天线间的第一相位差;电子设备可以将第一相位差与映射关系表相匹配,以获取与第一相位差相匹配的第一信号到达角度集合,该第一信号到达角度集合包括至少两个信号到达角度;将天线单元从第一天线场型状态切换至第二天线场型状态,确定第二天线场型状态的天线单元的第二相位差,匹配第二天线场型状态下天线间相位差与信号到达角度的映射关系表,确定与第二相位差相匹配的第二到达角度集合,该第二到达角度集合包括至少一个到达角度;由于在第一天线场型状态下和第二天线场型状态下的接收的信号真实的到达角度不变,第一到达角度集合和第二到达角度集合相重合的到达角度即为真实的到达角度。这样,电子设备可以更为准确地估算出电子设备所接收无线电信号的到达角度。An embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal. The method may include: the electronic device has a positioning function. When the user uses the electronic device for positioning, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores different In the field state, the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the angle of arrival of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the first phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 in the first antenna pattern state; the electronic device The first phase difference can be matched with the mapping relationship table to obtain a first set of signal arrival angles matched with the first phase difference, and the first set of signal arrival angles includes at least two signal arrival angles; The first antenna pattern state is switched to the second antenna pattern state, the second phase difference of the antenna unit in the second antenna pattern state is determined, and the mapping relationship between the phase difference between the antennas and the signal arrival angle in the second antenna pattern state is matched. , determine a second set of arrival angles matched with the second phase difference, the second set of arrival angles includes at least one arrival angle; since the received signals under the first antenna pattern state and the second antenna pattern state are true The angle of arrival remains unchanged, and the angle of arrival at which the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles overlap is the real angle of arrival. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
本申请实施例中的电子设备可以具有两个天线、或三个天线、以及四个或四个以上的天线。本申请实施例对电子设备中的天线数量不作限定。下面实施例以电子设备有三个天线为例进行阐述。The electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may have two antennas, or three antennas, and four or more antennas. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of antennas in the electronic device. The following embodiments are described by taking an electronic device with three antennas as an example.
图15示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图。如图7所示,本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法可以包括如下步骤:FIG. 15 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
S150、电子设备通过第一天线、第二天线、第三天线接收无线电信号S1,电子设备中存储有天线场型状态集合下,接收不同方位的无线电信号时,第一天线与第二天线的相位差,以及第一天线与第三天线的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表。S150. The electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna. The electronic device stores the phases of the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving radio signals from different directions under the antenna field state set. difference, and a mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
电子设备中可以有第一天线和第二天线以及第三天线。当用户通过电子设备定位时,电子设备可以通过第一天线、第二天线、第三天线接收无线电信号S1。该无线电信号S1可以是基站发射的信号,也可以是路由器发射的信号,也可以是其他电子设备发射的信号,此处不作限定。There may be a first antenna and a second antenna and a third antenna in the electronic device. When the user locates through the electronic device, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna. The radio signal S1 may be a signal transmitted by a base station, may also be a signal transmitted by a router, or may be a signal transmitted by other electronic devices, which is not limited herein.
在接收该无线电信号S1之前,电子设备中可以存储有电子设备的天线单元处于不同的天线场型状态下接收不同方位的无线电信号时,第一天线与第二天线的相位差,以及第一天线与第三天线的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表T1。该映射关系表T1可以是按照上述步骤S401-步骤S407建立的。映射关系表T1可以是上述表3中示出的映射关系表,也可以其他类型的映射关系表。本申请实施例对此不作限定。Before receiving the radio signal S1, the electronic device may store the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, and the A mapping relationship table T1 between the phase difference with the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal. The mapping relationship table T1 may be established according to the above steps S401-S407. The mapping relationship table T1 may be the mapping relationship table shown in Table 3 above, or other types of mapping relationship tables. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
S151、电子设备确定接收无线电信号S1的天线场型状态并计算在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差。S151. The electronic device determines the antenna pattern state for receiving the radio signal S1 and calculates the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1.
当电子设备通过图9所示的电路单元实现不同天线场型状态的切换,当天线开关处于第一位置时,馈源通过第一馈点电连接第一天线,其他馈源通过相应的馈点连接对应的天线,电子设备的天线单元处于第一天线场型状态;该馈源通过第二馈点电连接第一天线,其他馈源通过相应的馈点连接对应的天线,电子设备的天线单元处于第二天线场型状态。当然,电子设备还可通过其他方式确定对应的天线场型状态。When the electronic device realizes switching of different antenna pattern states through the circuit unit shown in Figure 9, when the antenna switch is in the first position, the feed source is electrically connected to the first antenna through the first feed point, and other feed sources pass through the corresponding feed point Connect the corresponding antenna, the antenna unit of the electronic device is in the first antenna pattern state; the feed source is electrically connected to the first antenna through the second feed point, and other feed sources are connected to the corresponding antenna through the corresponding feed point, the antenna unit of the electronic device In the state of the second antenna pattern. Of course, the electronic device can also determine the corresponding antenna pattern state in other ways.
当接收无线电信号S1时,电子设备可以计算出第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差。When receiving the radio signal S1, the electronic device may calculate a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and a second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna.
电子设备的第一天线在接收该无线电信号S1时,电子设备可以确定出第一天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000005
电子设备的第二天线在接收该无线电信号S1时,电子设备可以确定出第二天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000006
电子设备的第三天线在接收该无线电信号S1时,电子设备可以确定出第三天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000007
电子设备可以根据第一天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000008
和第二天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000009
确定出在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的相位差PD1为
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000010
电子设备可以根据第一天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000011
和第三天线接收的该无线电信号S1的相位
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000012
确定出在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第三天线的相位差PD2为
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000013
When the first antenna of the electronic device receives the radio signal S1, the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000005
When the second antenna of the electronic device receives the radio signal S1, the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the second antenna
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000006
When the third antenna of the electronic device receives the radio signal S1, the electronic device can determine the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the third antenna
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000007
According to the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna, the electronic device can
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000008
and the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the second antenna
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000009
It is determined that when receiving the radio signal S1, the phase difference PD1 between the first antenna and the second antenna is
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000010
According to the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the first antenna, the electronic device can
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000011
and the phase of the radio signal S1 received by the third antenna
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000012
It is determined that when receiving the radio signal S1, the phase difference PD2 between the first antenna and the third antenna is
Figure PCTCN2022128077-appb-000013
S152、电子设备依据天线场型状态、第一相位差PD1、第二相位差PD2及映射关系表T1确定与第一相位差PD1和第二相位差PD2相匹配的第一到达角度集合。S152. The electronic device determines a first set of arrival angles matching the first phase difference PD1 and the second phase difference PD2 according to the antenna pattern state, the first phase difference PD1, the second phase difference PD2, and the mapping relationship table T1.
其中第一到达角度集合包括至少两个到达角度。Wherein the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备依据第一相位差PD1和映射关系表T1确定与第一相位差PD1的第一到达角度子集合,依据第二相位差PD2和映射关系表T1确定与第二相位差PD2的第二到达角度子集合,确定第一到达角度子集合和第二到达角度子集合的交集,该交集即为第一到达角集合。In a possible implementation, the electronic device determines the first angle-of-arrival subset with the first phase difference PD1 according to the first phase difference PD1 and the mapping relationship table T1, and determines the angle-of-arrival subset with the first phase difference PD2 and the mapping relationship table T1 according to the second phase difference PD2 and the mapping relationship table T1. The second angle-of-arrival subset of the second phase difference PD2 determines the intersection of the first angle-of-arrival subset and the second angle-of-arrival subset, and the intersection is the first angle-of-arrival set.
示例性地,第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差为1.2π,映射关系表T1中1.2π对应三个到达角度:60°、120°和150°;第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差为0.5π,映射关系表T1中1.2π对应三个到达角度:60°、120°和210°;如此,第一到达角集合为60°和120°。Exemplarily, the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna is 1.2π, and 1.2π in the mapping relationship table T1 corresponds to three arrival angles: 60°, 120° and 150°; The second phase difference is 0.5π, and 1.2π in the mapping relationship table T1 corresponds to three arrival angles: 60°, 120° and 210°; thus, the first set of arrival angles are 60° and 120°.
可选地,该映射关系表T1可以存储在电子设备中,也可以存储在云服务器或服务器中。当该映射关系表T1存储在云服务器或服务器中时,电子设备可以将第一相位差PD1、第二相位差PD2发送给云服务器或服务器,该云服务器或服务器可以匹配出第一相位差PD1、第二相位差PD2与映射关系表T1中到达角度对应的第一到达角度集合。Optionally, the mapping relationship table T1 may be stored in an electronic device, or in a cloud server or a server. When the mapping relationship table T1 is stored in the cloud server or server, the electronic device can send the first phase difference PD1 and the second phase difference PD2 to the cloud server or server, and the cloud server or server can match the first phase difference PD1 , the first arrival angle set corresponding to the second phase difference PD2 and the arrival angle in the mapping relationship table T1.
电子设备可以计算第一相位差及第二相位差与映像关系表中所有到达角度对应的相位差的相似度。The electronic device may calculate the similarity between the first phase difference and the second phase difference and the phase differences corresponding to all arrival angles in the mapping relationship table.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备可以通过计算第一相位差及第二相位差与映像关系表中所有到达角度对应的相位差的差值之和来确定相似度。差值之和越大,相似度越低;反之,差值之和越高,相似度越高。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device may determine the similarity by calculating a sum of differences between the first phase difference and the second phase difference and phase differences corresponding to all arrival angles in the mapping relationship table. The larger the sum of differences, the lower the similarity; conversely, the higher the sum of differences, the higher the similarity.
例如,若映像关系表T1为表4中示出的映射关系表。第一相位差、第二相位差与映像关系表中所有到达角度对应的相位差差值之和的计算公式可以如下:For example, if the mapping relationship table T1 is the mapping relationship table shown in Table 4. The formula for calculating the sum of the phase difference values corresponding to all arrival angles in the first phase difference, the second phase difference and the image relationship table can be as follows:
Error0(i°)=|PD1-E(i°)|+|PD2-F(i°)|   公式1Error0(i°)=|PD1-E(i°)|+|PD2-F(i°)| Formula 1
其中,i°为无线电信号的到达角度,i=0,1,2,...,359。Wherein, i° is the arrival angle of the radio signal, i=0,1,2,...,359.
可以理解的是,Error0(i°)越小,即第一相位差PD1、第二相位差PD2与到达角度i°对应的相位差的相似度越高。电子设备可以按照上述公式1计算出Error0(0°)、Error0(1°)、Error0(2°)、…、Error0(359°)。It can be understood that the smaller Error0(i°), that is, the higher the similarity between the first phase difference PD1, the second phase difference PD2 and the phase difference corresponding to the arrival angle i°. The electronic device can calculate Error0(0°), Error0(1°), Error0(2°), . . . , Error0(359°) according to the above formula 1.
电子设备可以比较Error0(0°)、Error0(1°)、Error0(2°)、…、Error0(359°)的大小。电子设备取最小的差值之和对应的角度作为无线电信号S1的到达角度。例如,若Error0(0°)最小,那么电子设备确定该无线电信号S1的到达角度为0°。若Error0(1°)最小,那么电子设备确定该无线电信号S1的到达角度为1°。若Error0(359°)最小,那么电子设备确定该无线电信号S1的到达角度为359°。并依据确定的到达角度形成第一到达角度集合。The electronic device can compare the magnitudes of Error0(0°), Error0(1°), Error0(2°), . . . , Error0(359°). The electronic device takes the angle corresponding to the smallest difference sum as the arrival angle of the radio signal S1. For example, if Error0(0°) is the smallest, the electronic device determines that the arrival angle of the radio signal S1 is 0°. If Error0(1°) is the smallest, the electronic device determines that the angle of arrival of the radio signal S1 is 1°. If Error0 (359°) is the smallest, then the electronic device determines that the arrival angle of the radio signal S1 is 359°. And a first set of arrival angles is formed according to the determined arrival angles.
S153、电子设备切换天线场型状态,并计算在切换后的天线场型状态下,在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的第三相位差PD3以及第一天线与第三天线的第四相位差PD4。S153. The electronic device switches the antenna pattern state, and calculates the third phase difference PD3 between the first antenna and the second antenna and the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1 under the switched antenna pattern state The fourth phase difference PD4.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备通过开关选择天线的不同馈点,以实现天线单元的不同天线场型状态的切换。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device selects different feed points of the antenna through a switch, so as to realize switching of different antenna pattern states of the antenna unit.
第三相位差和第四相位差的计算方法如S151所述,这里不再赘述。The calculation methods of the third phase difference and the fourth phase difference are as described in S151, and will not be repeated here.
S154、电子设备依据切换后的天线场型状态、第三相位差PD3、第四相位差PD4及映射关系表T1确定与第三相位差PD3和第四相位差PD4相匹配的第二到达角度集合。S154. The electronic device determines the second arrival angle set matching the third phase difference PD3 and the fourth phase difference PD4 according to the switched antenna pattern state, the third phase difference PD3, the fourth phase difference PD4, and the mapping relationship table T1 .
其中第二到达角集合包括至少一个到达角度。Wherein the second set of angles of arrival includes at least one angle of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备依据第三相位差PD3和映射关系表T1确定与第三相位差PD3的第一到达角度子集合,依据第四相位差PD4和映射关系表T1确定与第四相位差PD4的第四到达角度子集合,确定第三到达角度子集合和第四到达角度子集合的交集,该交集即为第二到达角集合。In a possible implementation, the electronic device determines the first angle-of-arrival subset with the third phase difference PD3 according to the third phase difference PD3 and the mapping relationship table T1, and determines the angle-of-arrival subset with the third phase difference PD4 and the mapping relationship table T1 according to the fourth phase difference PD4 and the mapping relationship table T1. The fourth angle-of-arrival subset of the fourth phase difference PD4 determines the intersection of the third angle-of-arrival subset and the fourth angle-of-arrival subset, and the intersection is the second angle-of-arrival set.
S154、依据第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合确定真实的到达角度。S154. Determine a real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
在一种可能的实现方式中,确定第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合的交集,该交集仅包括一个到达角度,则该交集即为真实的到达角度。In a possible implementation manner, the intersection of the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles is determined, the intersection includes only one arrival angle, and the intersection is the real arrival angle.
通过本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法,当用户使用电子设备进行定位时,电子设备可以通过天线接收无线电信号S1,该电子设备中存储有在所有天线场型状态下,天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表;电子设备可以确定当前天线场型状态并计算接收该无线电信号S1时,天线间的相位差并确定映射关系表中与该相位差相匹配的第一到达角度集合;切换电子设备的天线场型状态,并计算切换后的天线场型状态下的相位差,电子设备确定映射关系表中与该相位差相匹配的第二到达角度集合,依据第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合确定真实的到达角度。由于,不同天线场型状态下,天线间的相位差存在明显区别且相同天线场型状态下,同一相位差值可能对应不同的到达角度,通过获取不同天线场型状态下的相位差,并基于不同天线场型状态下的相位差确定对应的到达角度。这样,电子设备可以更为准确地估算出电子设备所接收无线电信号的到达角度。According to a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal provided by the embodiment of the present application, when the user uses the electronic device for positioning, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores the information of all antenna pattern states and the distance between the antennas. The mapping relationship table between the phase difference of the radio signal and the arrival angle of the radio signal; the electronic device can determine the current antenna pattern state and calculate the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1, and determine the phase difference corresponding to the phase difference in the mapping relationship table Matching first set of arrival angles; switch the antenna pattern state of the electronic device, and calculate the phase difference under the switched antenna pattern state, and the electronic device determines the second arrival angle set in the mapping relationship table that matches the phase difference , determine the real angle of arrival according to the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles. Since, under different antenna pattern states, the phase difference between antennas is significantly different and under the same antenna pattern state, the same phase difference value may correspond to different angles of arrival, by obtaining the phase difference under different antenna pattern states, and based on The phase difference under different antenna pattern states determines the corresponding angle of arrival. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,确定第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合的交集,该交集包括至少两个到达角度,则重新执行步骤S153和S154,以获取另一天线场型状态的相位差,并确定该相位差相匹配的第三到达角集合,然后确定第一到达角集合、第二到达角集合和第三 到达角度的交集,循环以上步骤,直至获得的交集中仅存在一个到达角度,该到达角度即为真实的到达角度。In a possible implementation manner, the intersection of the first angle of arrival set and the second angle of arrival set is determined, and the intersection includes at least two angles of arrival, and steps S153 and S154 are re-executed to obtain another antenna pattern state Phase difference, and determine the third set of arrival angles that the phase difference matches, and then determine the intersection of the first set of arrival angles, the second set of arrival angles and the third set of arrival angles, and repeat the above steps until there is only one set of arrival angles in the obtained intersection Arrival angle, the arrival angle is the real arrival angle.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例提供的电子设备中可以包括第一天线与第二天线。电子设备可以是通过第一天线与第二天线接收无线电信号S1。It can be understood that, the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the first antenna and the second antenna. The electronic device may receive the radio signal S1 through the first antenna and the second antenna.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备通过第一天线与第二天线接收无线电信号S1,电子设备中存储有不同方位的无线电信号时,第一天线与第二天线的相位差与到达角度的映射关系表T2;第一天线场型状态下,电子设备计算在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差;确定映射关系表T2中与第一相位差配合的第一到达角度集合;切换至第二天线场型状态下,电子设备计算在接收来波方向相同的无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的第二相位差;确定映射关系表T2中与第二相位差配合的第二到达角度集合,依据第一到达角度集合和第二到达角度集合确定真实的到达角度。此处可以参考步骤S150-S154中的描述,这里不再赘述。映射关系表T2的建立过程可以参考上述步骤S401-S407中的描述,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation, the electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna and the second antenna. When the electronic device stores radio signals of different azimuths, the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the angle of arrival Mapping relationship table T2; in the first antenna pattern state, the electronic device calculates the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving the radio signal S1; determine the first phase difference that matches the first phase difference in the mapping relationship table T2 A set of arrival angles; when switching to the second antenna pattern state, the electronic device calculates the second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna when receiving the radio signal S1 with the same incoming wave direction; determine the second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the mapping relationship table T2 and The second set of angles of arrival matched with the second phase difference determines the real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival. Here, reference may be made to the description in steps S150-S154, which will not be repeated here. For the establishment process of the mapping relationship table T2, reference may be made to the descriptions in the above steps S401-S407, which will not be repeated here.
可以理解的是,这里电子设备可以有更多的天线。当天线的数量大于3时,电子设备对信号到达角度估计的过程可以参考步骤S150-S154中的描述,此处不再赘述。It is understandable that the electronic device can have more antennas here. When the number of antennas is greater than 3, the process of estimating the angle of arrival of the signal by the electronic device can refer to the description in steps S150-S154, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,映射关系表T1、映射关系表T2都可以称为第一映射表。In the embodiment of the present application, both the mapping relationship table T1 and the mapping relationship table T2 may be referred to as the first mapping table.
图16示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图。如图16所示,本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法可以包括如下步骤:FIG. 16 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 16, a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
S160、电子设备通过第一天线、第二天线、第三天线接收无线电信号S1,电子设备中存储有在天线场型状态集合下,电子设备接收不同方向的无线电信号时,第一天线与第二天线的相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表。S160. The electronic device receives the radio signal S1 through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna. The electronic device stores the data of the first antenna and the second antenna when the electronic device receives radio signals from different directions under the antenna field state set. The phase difference of the antennas and the mapping relationship table between the phase difference of the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
其中天线场型状态集合包括电子设备可实现的至少两个天线场型状态,例若电子设备通过切换天线的馈点切换天线场型状态,且第一天线、第二天线、第三天线均具有两个馈点;若每次切换天线场型状态时,第一天线、第二天线、第三天线均需切换馈点,则该电子设备的天线场型状态集合具有两种天线场型状态;若每次切换天线场型状态时,电子设备仅需切换第一天线、第二天线和第三天线中任一天线的馈点,则该电子设备的天线场型状态集合具有六种天线场型状态。The set of antenna pattern states includes at least two antenna pattern states achievable by the electronic device. For example, if the electronic device switches the antenna pattern state by switching the antenna feed point, and the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna all have Two feed points; if the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna need to switch feed points each time the antenna pattern state is switched, then the antenna pattern state set of the electronic device has two antenna pattern states; If the electronic device only needs to switch the feed point of any one of the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna each time the antenna pattern state is switched, then the antenna pattern state set of the electronic device has six antenna patterns state.
电子设备中存储有接收不同方向的无线电信号时,在天线场型状态集合下,第一天线与第二天线的相位差、以及第一天线与第三天线的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度的映射关系表。电子设备建立映射关系表的过程可以参考上述步骤S401-步骤S407,此处不再赘述。When receiving radio signals from different directions, the electronic device stores the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna and the angle of arrival of the radio signal under the set of antenna pattern states. Mapping table. For the process of establishing the mapping relationship table by the electronic device, reference may be made to the above step S401-step S407, which will not be repeated here.
S161、电子设备确定当前的天线场型状态并计算在接收无线电信号S1时,第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差。S161. The electronic device determines the current antenna pattern state and calculates a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and a second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving the radio signal S1.
S162、电子设备记录并存储当前的天线场型状态下的第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差。S162. The electronic device records and stores the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna under the current antenna pattern state.
S163、电子设备判断是否记录并存储天线场型状态集合的所有天线天线场型状态下的第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差。若电子设备未记录并存储天线场型状态集合的所有天线天线场型状态下的第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差,执行S164;若电子设备已记录并存储天线场型状态集合的所有天线天线场型状态下的第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线 的第二相位差,执行S165。S163. The electronic device determines whether to record and store the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set. If the electronic device does not record and store the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set, execute S164; If the electronic device has recorded and stored the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in all the antenna pattern states of the antenna pattern state set, execute S165.
S164、电子设备确定未记录和存储第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差的天线场型状态,并将当前的天线场型状态切换至未记录和存储的天线场型状态。然后跳转至步骤S161。S164. The electronic device determines that the antenna pattern state has not recorded and stored the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the second phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna, and switches the current antenna pattern state to Unrecorded and stored antenna pattern states. Then jump to step S161.
具体地,电子设备依据天线场型状态集合和电子设备中存储的天线场型状态,确定天线场型状态集合中未记录并存储第一天线与第二天线的第一相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的第二相位差的天线场型状态。Specifically, according to the antenna pattern state set and the antenna pattern state stored in the electronic device, the electronic device determines that the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna are not recorded and stored in the antenna pattern state set. The antenna pattern state of the second phase difference of the third antenna.
S165、电子设备依据映射关系表和存储的天线场型状态集合下电子设备接收无线电信号时第一天线与第二天线的相位差以及第一天线与第三天线的相位差确定真实的到达角度。S165. The electronic device determines the real angle of arrival according to the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when the electronic device receives the radio signal under the mapping relationship table and the stored antenna pattern state set.
通过本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法,当用户使用电子设备进行定位时,电子设备可以通过天线接收无线电信号S1,该电子设备中存储有天线场型状态集合下天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表;电子设备可以计算在天线场型状态集合下接收该无线电信号S1时天线间的相位差,由于电子设备在不同的天线场型状态下,天线接收的信号的到达角度均相同,但不同天线场型状态下,天线间的相位差存在明显区别,通过计算多个天线场型状态下的相位差以解决相同的相位差对应多个到达角度的问题。这样,电子设备可以更为准确地估算出电子设备所接收无线电信号的到达角度。Through a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal provided by the embodiment of this application, when the user uses an electronic device for positioning, the electronic device can receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores the phase between the antennas under the antenna pattern state set The mapping relationship between the difference and the angle of arrival of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 under the antenna pattern state set, because the electronic device is in different antenna pattern states, the antenna The arrival angles of the received signals are all the same, but the phase difference between the antennas is obviously different under different antenna pattern states. By calculating the phase difference under multiple antenna pattern states, the same phase difference corresponds to multiple arrival angles. question. In this way, the electronic device can more accurately estimate the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
可以理解地,在其他实施例中,通过建立到达角度查询数学回归模型,该数学回归模型中:将相位差设置为特征值,将相位差对应的到达角度设置为卷标值;获取不同天线场型状态下的相位差值,并将该相位差至输入数学回归模型,以获取电子设备所接收无线电信号的到达角度。Understandably, in other embodiments, the mathematical regression model is queried by establishing the angle of arrival. In the mathematical regression model: the phase difference is set as a feature value, and the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference is set as a tag value; The phase difference value in the type state is input into the mathematical regression model to obtain the angle of arrival of the radio signal received by the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备估计信号的到达角度之前,电子设备中可以存储有到达角度计算函数。通过向该到达角度计算函数输入相位差和对应的天线场型状态的标识,该到达角度计算函数可输出该相位差对应的到达角度。例如,向到达角度计算函数输入的相位差3°和对应的天线场型状态的标识1,到达角度计算函数输出的到达角度为30°和120°;向到达角度计算函数输入的相位差3°、7°以及对应的天线场型状态的标识1、2,到达角度计算函数输出的到达角度为120°。其中天线场型状态标识用于标识对应的天线场型状态。In some embodiments, before the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, an arrival angle calculation function may be stored in the electronic device. By inputting the phase difference and the identification of the corresponding antenna pattern state into the angle-of-arrival calculation function, the angle-of-arrival calculation function can output the angle of arrival corresponding to the phase difference. For example, the phase difference 3° input to the angle-of-arrival calculation function and the identification 1 of the corresponding antenna pattern state, the angle-of-arrival output of the angle-of-arrival calculation function are 30° and 120°; the phase difference input to the angle-of-arrival calculation function is 3° , 7° and the corresponding signs 1 and 2 of the antenna pattern state, the arrival angle output by the angle-of-arrival calculation function is 120°. The antenna pattern state identifier is used to identify the corresponding antenna pattern state.
可选地,该到达角度计算函数可为由电子设备的历史数据基于数学算法训练而成的机器模型,其中数学算法可为神经网络算法、随机森林算法等,历史数据为电子设备的天线单元的天线场型状态集合下的不同到达角度,以及不同到达角度对应的相位差的集合,该历史数据可为图4所述方式记录的映射关系表的数据,也可为通过其他方式获得的数据,对此,本申请不作限定。当然,该到达角度计算函数可也基于其他方式确定的,例如基于到达角度与相位差之间的运算规则形成的多维函数,本申请对该函数的实现方式不作限定。Optionally, the angle-of-arrival calculation function may be a machine model trained by historical data of the electronic device based on a mathematical algorithm, wherein the mathematical algorithm may be a neural network algorithm, a random forest algorithm, etc., and the historical data is the antenna unit of the electronic device. The different angles of arrival under the set of antenna pattern states, and the set of phase differences corresponding to different angles of arrival, the historical data can be the data of the mapping relationship table recorded in the manner described in Figure 4, or the data obtained by other means, In this regard, this application does not make a limitation. Of course, the angle-of-arrival calculation function may also be determined based on other methods, for example, a multi-dimensional function formed based on the calculation rules between the angle-of-arrival and the phase difference, and the implementation of the function is not limited in this application.
如此,在电子设备估算信号的到达角度时,电子设备控制天线单元在多个天线场型状中至少切换一次,例如从第一天线场型状态切换至第二天线场型状态。以获得至少两个天线场型状态对应的至少两个相位差,例如接收相同到达角度的无线电信号时第一天线和第二天线的相位差及第一天线和第三天线的相位差;将至少两个相位差及对应天线场型状态标识输入到达角度计算函数;若到达角度计算函数的输出仅包括一个到达角度,则该到达角度即为信号的到达角度;若到达角度计算函数输出至少两个到达角度,则电子设备控制天线单元在多个天线场型状下再次进行切换,例如从第二天线场型状态切换至第三天线场型状态,并将所 得的相位差及对应的天线场型标识输入到达角度计算函数中,循环以上步骤,直至到达角度计算函数输出仅包括一个到达角度。可选地,在另一实施例中,在电子设备估算信号的到达角度时,电子设备控制天线单元在多个天线场型状中的不同天线场型状依次切换,直至获得天线单元的每个天线场型单元对应的天线间的相位差;将该相位差及对应天线场型状态的标识输入到达角度计算函数;到达角度计算函数的输出的到达角度即为信号的到达角度。In this way, when the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch at least once among multiple antenna patterns, for example, switching from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state. Obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states, for example, the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna and the phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna when receiving radio signals with the same angle of arrival; The two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern state identification are input into the angle of arrival calculation function; if the output of the angle of arrival calculation function includes only one angle of arrival, then the angle of arrival is the angle of arrival of the signal; if the angle of arrival calculation function outputs at least two angle of arrival, the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch again under multiple antenna pattern states, for example, switching from the second antenna pattern state to the third antenna pattern state, and the obtained phase difference and the corresponding antenna pattern state In the identification input calculation function of the angle of arrival, the above steps are repeated until the output of the calculation function of the angle of arrival includes only one angle of arrival. Optionally, in another embodiment, when the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival of the signal, the electronic device controls the different antenna field shapes of the antenna unit in the multiple antenna field shapes to switch sequentially until each antenna unit obtains The phase difference between the antennas corresponding to the antenna pattern unit; the phase difference and the identification of the corresponding antenna pattern state are input into the angle of arrival calculation function; the angle of arrival output by the angle of arrival calculation function is the angle of arrival of the signal.
如图17所示,电子设备100中可以包括天线单元10、射频前端单元20、信号处理与控制单元30。图17示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法的流程示意图。如图17所示,本申请实施例提供的一种信号到达角度估计方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 17 , the electronic device 100 may include an antenna unit 10 , a radio frequency front-end unit 20 , and a signal processing and control unit 30 . FIG. 17 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a method for estimating a signal angle of arrival provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 17, a signal angle of arrival estimation method provided in the embodiment of the present application may include the following steps:
S171、接收无线电信号。S171. Receive a radio signal.
这里,电子设备通过天线单元接收无线电信号,天线单元10中可以包括2个天线、或者3个天线、或者4个天线、或者4个以上的天线。此处对天线单元10中的天线个数不作限定。Here, the electronic device receives radio signals through the antenna unit, and the antenna unit 10 may include 2 antennas, or 3 antennas, or 4 antennas, or more than 4 antennas. The number of antennas in the antenna unit 10 is not limited here.
S172、发送接收的无线电信号。S172. Send the received radio signal.
电子设备100的天线单元10将接收的无线电信号发送给射频前端单元20。The antenna unit 10 of the electronic device 100 sends the received radio signal to the RF front-end unit 20 .
射频前端单元中可以包括多个射频前端模块。可以理解的是,一个天线可以对应一个射频前端模块。每个天线可以将接收到的无线电信号发送给对应的射频前端模块。以天线单元10中具有两个天线(天线1和天线2)为例,射频前端单元20中可以包括天线1对应的射频前端模块1、以及天线2对应的射频前端模块2。天线1可以将接收的无线电信号发送给射频前端模块1。天线2可以将接收的无线电信号发送给射频前端模块2。The radio frequency front-end unit may include multiple radio frequency front-end modules. It can be understood that one antenna may correspond to one radio frequency front-end module. Each antenna can send the received radio signal to the corresponding radio frequency front-end module. Taking antenna unit 10 with two antennas (antenna 1 and antenna 2 ) as an example, radio frequency front-end unit 20 may include radio frequency front-end module 1 corresponding to antenna 1 and radio frequency front-end module 2 corresponding to antenna 2 . The antenna 1 can send the received radio signal to the radio frequency front-end module 1 . The antenna 2 can send the received radio signal to the radio frequency front-end module 2 .
S173、将无线电信号转换为基带信号。S173. Convert the radio signal into a baseband signal.
电子设备100的射频前端单元20将无线电信号转换为基带信号。The RF front-end unit 20 of the electronic device 100 converts radio signals into baseband signals.
例如,射频前端模块1以将天线1接收的无线电信号转换为基带信号1。射频前端模块2可以将天线2接收的无线电信号转换为基带信号2。For example, the radio frequency front-end module 1 can convert the radio signal received by the antenna 1 into a baseband signal 1 . The radio frequency front-end module 2 can convert the radio signal received by the antenna 2 into a baseband signal 2 .
S174、发送基带信号。S174. Send the baseband signal.
电子设备100的射频前端单元20向信号处理与控制单元30发送基带信号。The radio frequency front-end unit 20 of the electronic device 100 sends a baseband signal to the signal processing and control unit 30 .
例如,射频前端单元20中射频前端模块1与射频前端模块2可以分别向信号处理与控制单元30发送基带信号1与基带信号2。For example, the RF front-end module 1 and the RF front-end module 2 in the RF front-end unit 20 may send the baseband signal 1 and the baseband signal 2 to the signal processing and control unit 30 respectively.
S175、计算接收到的基带信号间的相位差。S175. Calculate the phase difference between the received baseband signals.
电子设备100的信号处理与控制单元30计算接收到的基带信号间的相位差。The signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 calculates the phase difference between the received baseband signals.
例如,信号处理与控制单元30可以计算出基带信号1与基带信号2的相位差。这里,步骤S175可以参考步骤S151中电子设备计算相位差描述,此处不再赘述。For example, the signal processing and control unit 30 can calculate the phase difference between the baseband signal 1 and the baseband signal 2 . Here, for step S175, reference may be made to the description of calculating the phase difference by the electronic device in step S151, which will not be repeated here.
S176、将计算得到的天线间的相位差及当前的天线场型状态与映射关系表进行匹配,以确定与该相位差相匹配的第一到达角度集合。S176. Match the calculated phase difference between the antennas and the current antenna pattern state with the mapping relationship table, so as to determine a first set of arrival angles matching the phase difference.
其中第一到达角度集合包括至少两个到达角度。Wherein the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival.
映像关系表中保存了在天线场型状态集合下所有到达角度对应的相位差,天线场型状态集合包括电子设备支持的所有天线场型状态。The mapping relationship table stores the phase differences corresponding to all angles of arrival under the antenna pattern state set, and the antenna pattern state set includes all antenna pattern states supported by the electronic device.
电子设备100的信号处理与控制单元30将计算得到的相位差及当前的天线场型状态与映射关系表进行匹配,以确定与该相位差相匹配的第一到达角度集合。The signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 matches the calculated phase difference and the current antenna pattern state with the mapping relationship table to determine the first set of arrival angles matching the phase difference.
这里,映射关系表可以参考上述步骤中映射关系表的描述,此处不再赘述。Here, for the mapping relationship table, reference may be made to the description of the mapping relationship table in the above steps, which will not be repeated here.
S177、切换天线场型状态,并计算在切换后的天线场型状态下接收无线电信号S1时天线 间的相位差。S177. Switch the antenna pattern state, and calculate the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 in the switched antenna pattern state.
电子设备100的信号处理与控制单元30切换天线场型状态,并计算在切换后的天线场型状态下接收无线电信号S1时天线间的相位差。The signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 switches the antenna pattern state, and calculates the phase difference between the antennas when receiving the radio signal S1 in the switched antenna pattern state.
S178、依据切换后的天线场型状态下天线间的相位差及映射关系表确定与该相位差相匹配的第二到达角度集合。S178. Determine a second set of arrival angles matching the phase difference according to the phase difference between the antennas in the switched antenna pattern state and the mapping relationship table.
电子设备100的信号处理与控制单元30电子设备依据切换后的天线场型状态下天线间的相位差及映射关系表确定与该相位差相匹配的第二到达角度集合。The signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 determines the second set of arrival angles matching the phase difference according to the phase difference between the antennas in the switched antenna pattern state and the mapping relationship table.
S179、依据第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合确定真实的到达角度。S179. Determine a real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
电子设备100的信号处理与控制单元30依据第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合确定真实的到达角度。The signal processing and control unit 30 of the electronic device 100 determines the real angle of arrival according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
本申请实施例提供了一种信号到达角度估计方法,该方法可以包括:当用户使用电子设备进行定位时,电子设备可以通过天线接收无线电信号S1,该电子设备中存储有在天线场型状态集合下天线间的相位差与无线电信号的到达角度之间的映射关系表;电子设备可以计算当前天线场型状态下接收该无线电信号S1时,天线间的相位差并确定映射关系表中与该相位差相匹配的第一到达角度集合;切换电子设备的天线场型状态,并计算切换后的天线场型状态对应的相位差,电子设备确定映射关系表中与该第二相位差相匹配的第二到达角度集合,依据第一到达角集合和第二到达角集合确定真实的到达角度。由于,不同天线场型状态下,天线间的相位差存在明显区别且相同天线场型状态下,同一相位差值可能对应不同的到达角度,通过获取不同天线场型状态下的相位差,并基于不同天线场型状态下的相位差确定对应的到达角度。这样,可以提高电子设备估计得到信号的到达角度的准确率。An embodiment of the present application provides a method for estimating the angle of arrival of a signal, the method may include: when the user uses an electronic device for positioning, the electronic device may receive the radio signal S1 through the antenna, and the electronic device stores a set of antenna pattern states Below is the mapping relationship table between the phase difference between the antennas and the arrival angle of the radio signal; the electronic device can calculate the phase difference between the antennas and determine the phase difference between the antennas and determine the phase difference in the mapping relationship table when receiving the radio signal S1 in the current antenna pattern state. The first angle-of-arrival set that matches the difference; switch the antenna pattern state of the electronic device, and calculate the phase difference corresponding to the switched antenna pattern state, and the electronic device determines the second phase difference that matches the second phase difference in the mapping relationship table. The second set of arrival angles is to determine the real arrival angle according to the first set of arrival angles and the second set of arrival angles. Since, under different antenna pattern states, the phase difference between antennas is significantly different and under the same antenna pattern state, the same phase difference value may correspond to different angles of arrival, by obtaining the phase difference under different antenna pattern states, and based on The phase difference under different antenna pattern states determines the corresponding angle of arrival. In this way, the accuracy rate of the angle of arrival of the signal estimated by the electronic device can be improved.
请参见图18A和图18B,其中图18A为电子设备仅通过一种天线场型状态估算到达角度的仿真结果,图18A中电子设备的天线场型状态固定且仅有一种,从图18A可以得出,当电子设备通过单天线场型状态的天线间的相位差估算到达角度时,很多来波方向的到达角度都会发生混淆,如25°~45°、130°~150°、205°~225°、310°~330°,都有很严重的混淆(超过100度的混淆);图18B中电子设备具有两种天线场型状态且电子设备可实现两种天线场型状态的切换,通过两种天线场型状态的切换实现估算到达角度,从图18B可以得出,当电子设备通过双天线场型状态的天线间的相位差估算到达角度时,到达角度发生严重混淆的来波方向缩减至30~40度与210~220度而已,其中图18为本申请一实施例。即本申请通过在多个天线场型状态下获取来波信号的天线间的相位差估算到达角度,可降低到达角度的误差,提升到达角度的准确率。Please refer to Figure 18A and Figure 18B, where Figure 18A is the simulation result of the electronic device estimating the angle of arrival through only one antenna pattern state, the antenna pattern state of the electronic device in Figure 18A is fixed and only one, from Figure 18A it can be obtained It is found that when the electronic equipment estimates the angle of arrival through the phase difference between the antennas of the single antenna pattern state, the angle of arrival of many incoming wave directions will be confused, such as 25°~45°, 130°~150°, 205°~225° °, 310°~330°, all have very serious confusion (over 100 degree confusion); in Figure 18B, the electronic device has two antenna field states and the electronic device can switch between the two antenna field states. The angle of arrival is estimated by switching between the two antenna pattern states. From Figure 18B, it can be concluded that when the electronic device estimates the angle of arrival through the phase difference between the antennas in the dual antenna pattern state, the direction of arrival where the angle of arrival is seriously confused is reduced to 30 to 40 degrees and 210 to 220 degrees only, where Fig. 18 is an embodiment of the present application. That is, the present application estimates the angle of arrival by obtaining the phase difference between the antennas of the incoming signal under multiple antenna pattern states, which can reduce the error of the angle of arrival and improve the accuracy of the angle of arrival.
下面首先介绍本申请实施例提供的示例性电子设备100。The exemplary electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is firstly introduced below.
图19是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100的架构示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
下面以电子设备100为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是,电子设备100可以具有比图中所示的更多的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或多个的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。Hereinafter, the embodiment will be specifically described by taking the electronic device 100 as an example. It should be understood that electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in the figures, may combine two or more components, or may have a different configuration of components. The various components shown in the figures may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
电子设备100可以包括:处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话 器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2. Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194 and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。Wherein, the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。 Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
可以理解的是,电子设备100还可以包括更多的天线,例如天线3、天线4、…、以及天线N。天线3、天线4、…、以及天线N用于接收无线电信号。It can be understood that the electronic device 100 may further include more antennas, such as the antenna 3 , the antenna 4 , . . . , and the antenna N. Antenna 3 , antenna 4 , . . . , and antenna N are used to receive radio signals.
电子设备中的天线1和天线2可以是外置天线,也可以是内置天线,此处不作限定。其中外置天线的种类可以包括:单极天线、螺旋天线以及PCB(Printed circuit board,印刷电路板)螺旋天线。内置天线可以包括:微带贴片天线、缝隙天线、IFA天线(Inverted-F Antenna,倒F天线)、PIFA天线(planar Inverted-F Antenna,平面倒F天线)、FPC(flexible printed circuit,柔性印刷电路)天线等等。The antenna 1 and the antenna 2 in the electronic device may be external antennas or built-in antennas, which are not limited here. The types of external antennas may include: monopole antennas, helical antennas, and PCB (Printed circuit board, printed circuit board) helical antennas. Built-in antennas can include: microstrip patch antenna, slot antenna, IFA antenna (Inverted-F Antenna, inverted F antenna), PIFA antenna (planar Inverted-F Antenna, planar inverted F antenna), FPC (flexible printed circuit, flexible printing circuits) antennas, etc.
影响天线性能的临界参数有很多,通常在天线设计过程中可以进行调整,如谐振频率、阻抗、增益、孔径或辐射方向图、极化、效率和带宽等。另外,发射天线还有最大额定功率,而接收天线则有噪声抑制参数。There are many critical parameters that affect antenna performance and can usually be adjusted during the antenna design process, such as resonant frequency, impedance, gain, aperture or radiation pattern, polarization, efficiency, and bandwidth. In addition, the transmit antenna has a maximum power rating, while the receive antenna has noise rejection parameters.
在一些实施例中,天线1和天线2中还可以包括射频前端模块。天线1对应的射频前端模块用于将天线1接收的无线电信号(例如,电磁波)转换为基带信号。天线2对应的射频前端模块用于将天线2接收的无线电信号转换为基带信号。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 may further include a radio frequency front-end module. The radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 1 is used to convert the radio signal (for example, electromagnetic wave) received by the antenna 1 into a baseband signal. The radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 2 is used to convert the radio signal received by the antenna 2 into a baseband signal.
可选地,天线1和天线1对应的射频前端模块可以耦合在一个天线芯片中。天线2和天线2对应的射频前端模块可以耦合在一个天线芯片中。移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。Optionally, the antenna 1 and the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 1 may be coupled in one antenna chip. The antenna 2 and the radio frequency front-end module corresponding to the antenna 2 may be coupled in one antenna chip. The mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves and radiate them through the antenna 1 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Wherein, the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 . In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In some other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple  access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc. The GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。The ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By referring to the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
内部存储器121可以包括一个或多个随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)和一个或多个非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory,NVM)。The internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).
随机存取存储器可以包括静态随机存储器(static random-access memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)、同步动态随机存储器(synchronous dynamic random access memory,SDRAM)、双倍资料率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory,DDR SDRAM,例如第五代DDR SDRAM一般称为DDR5SDRAM)等;Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous dynamic random access memory, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous Dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, such as the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.;
非易失性存储器可以包括磁盘存储器件、快闪存储器(flash memory)。Non-volatile memory may include magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory (flash memory).
快闪存储器按照运作原理划分可以包括NOR FLASH、NAND FLASH、3D NAND FLASH等,按照存储单元电位阶数划分可以包括单阶存储单元(single-level cell,SLC)、多阶存储单元(multi-level cell,MLC)、三阶储存单元(triple-level cell,TLC)、四阶储存单元(quad- level cell,QLC)等,按照存储规范划分可以包括通用闪存存储(英文:universal flash storage,UFS)、嵌入式多媒体存储卡(embedded multi media Card,eMMC)等。According to the operating principle, flash memory can include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc. According to the potential order of storage cells, it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), three-level storage unit (triple-level cell, TLC), fourth-level storage unit (quad-level cell, QLC), etc., can include universal flash storage (English: universal flash storage, UFS) according to storage specifications , embedded multimedia memory card (embedded multi media Card, eMMC), etc.
随机存取存储器可以由处理器110直接进行读写,可以用于存储操作系统或其他正在运行中的程序的可执行程序(例如机器指令),还可以用于存储用户及应用程序的数据等。The random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, and can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of an operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store data of users and application programs.
非易失性存储器也可以存储可执行程序和存储用户及应用程序的数据等,可以提前加载到随机存取存储器中,用于处理器110直接进行读写。The non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and data of users and application programs, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for the processor 110 to directly read and write.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal. The audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 receives a call or a voice message, the receiver 170B can be placed close to the human ear to receive the voice.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a phone call or sending a voice message, the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。 Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。Touch sensor 180K, also known as "touch panel".
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
马达191可以产生振动提示。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
图20是本申请实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。FIG. 20 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present application.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,运行时(Runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the system is divided into four layers, which are application program layer, application program framework layer, runtime (Runtime) and system library, and kernel layer from top to bottom.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
如图20所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序(也可以称为应用)。As shown in FIG. 20, the application package may include application programs (also called applications) such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图20所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 20, the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话界面形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog interface. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
运行时(Runtime)包括核心库和虚拟机。Runtime负责系统的调度和管理。Runtime (Runtime) includes the core library and virtual machine. Runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是编程语言(例如,jave语言)需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是系统的核心库。The core library includes two parts: one part is the function function that the programming language (for example, jave language) needs to call, and the other part is the core library of the system.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的编程文件(例如,jave文件)执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes programming files (for example, jave files) of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),二维图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了二维(2-Dimensional,2D)和三维(3-Dimensional,3D)图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem, and provides fusion of two-dimensional (2-Dimensional, 2D) and three-dimensional (3-Dimensional, 3D) layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现3D图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动,虚拟卡驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, a sensor driver, and a virtual card driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example. The camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
综上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。In summary, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, rather than to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: it can still The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments are modified, or some of the technical features are replaced equivalently; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions depart from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
上述实施例中所用,根据上下文,术语“当…时”可以被解释为意思是“如果…”或“在…后”或“响应于确定…”或“响应于检测到…”。类似地,根据上下文,短语“在确定…时”或“如果检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释为意思是“如果确定…”或“响应于确定…”或“在检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”。As used in the above embodiments, depending on the context, the term "when" may be interpreted to mean "if" or "after" or "in response to determining..." or "in response to detecting...". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrase "in determining" or "if detected (a stated condition or event)" may be interpreted to mean "if determining..." or "in response to determining..." or "on detecting (a stated condition or event)" or "in response to detecting (a stated condition or event)".
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state hard disk), etc.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁盘或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are realized. The processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware. The programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media. When the programs are executed , may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Claims (19)

  1. 一种信号到达角度估计方法,应用于电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括天线单元,所述天线单元包括第一天线和第二天线,所述天线单元具有多个天线场型状态,所述方法包括:A signal angle of arrival estimation method applied to electronic equipment, characterized in that the electronic equipment includes an antenna unit, the antenna unit includes a first antenna and a second antenna, and the antenna unit has a plurality of antenna pattern states, The methods include:
    所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差;The electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device receives the same arrival signal through the first antenna and the second antenna and calculating the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phase differences corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states;
    所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The electronic device determines the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device passes through the The first antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals having the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phases corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states Differences include:
    在所述多个天线场型状态中的第一天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号;In a first antenna pattern state of the plurality of antenna pattern states, the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
    所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和预设的映射关系表确定第一到达角度集合,其中,所述映射关系表包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差;The electronic device determines a first set of arrival angles according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and a preset mapping relationship table, wherein the mapping relationship table includes multiple antenna pattern states different angles of arrival, and phase differences between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
    若所述第一到达角度集合包括至少两个到达角度,所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第一天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第二天线场型状态,并通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下接收所述无线电信号;If the first set of angles of arrival includes at least two angles of arrival, the electronic device switches the antenna unit from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states state, and receiving said radio signal by said first antenna and said second antenna in said second antenna pattern state;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下的第二相位差。The electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 2, characterized in that,
    所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:所述电子设备依据所述第二相位差、所述第二天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第二到达角度集合;The electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: the electronic device determining the second phase difference according to the second phase difference, the second antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table. Two sets of angles of arrival;
    所述电子设备根据所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The electronic device determines an angle of arrival of the radio signal based on the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备根据所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival comprises:
    确定所述第一到达角度集合和所述第二到达角度集合的交集;determining an intersection of the first set of angles of arrival and the second set of angles of arrival;
    若所述交集包括一个到达角度,则确定所述到达角度为所述无线电信号的到达角度。If the intersection includes an angle of arrival, then determine the angle of arrival as the angle of arrival of the radio signal.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述交集包括至少两个到达角度,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein if the intersection includes at least two angles of arrival, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第二天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第三天线场型状态,并通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第三天线场型状态下接收 所述无线电信号;The electronic device switches the antenna unit from the second antenna pattern state to a third antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and through the first antenna and the second antenna receiving said radio signal in said third antenna pattern state;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述三天线场型状态下的第三相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a third phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the three antennas;
    所述电子设备依据所述第三相位差、所述第三天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第三到达角度集合;The electronic device determines a third set of angles of arrival according to the third phase difference, the third antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
    依据所述交集和所述第三到达角度集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined from the intersection and the third set of angles of arrival.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device passes through the The first antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals having the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phases corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states Differences include:
    所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在至少两个天线场型状态中不同的天线场型状态依次切换;在所述切换过程中,所述电子设备在每个天线场型状态下通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算每个天线场型状态下所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到所述天线单元的所有天线场型状态对应所述第一天线和所述第二天线的至少两个相位差。The electronic device controls the antenna unit to sequentially switch between different antenna pattern states in at least two antenna pattern states; during the switching process, the electronic device passes through the first antenna pattern state in each antenna pattern state An antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals with the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in each antenna pattern state, so as to obtain all antenna fields of the antenna unit A type state corresponds to at least two phase differences of the first antenna and the second antenna.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 6, characterized in that,
    所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:依据每个天线场型状态下所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差与预设的映射关系表确定对应的到达角集合,以得到所述至少两个天线场型状态对应的至少两个所述到达角集合,所述映射关系表包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差;The electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences includes: according to the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in each antenna pattern state and a preset mapping relationship The table determines the corresponding set of angles of arrival to obtain at least two sets of angles of arrival corresponding to the at least two antenna pattern states, the mapping relationship table includes different angles of arrival under multiple antenna pattern states, and the The phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to the different angles of arrival of the radio signal;
    依据至少两个所述到达角集合确定所述无线电信号的到达角度。The angle of arrival of the radio signal is determined based on at least two of the sets of angles of arrival.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述多个天线场型状态中切换;在每个天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收具有相同到达角度的无线电信号并计算所述第一天线和所述第二天线的相位差,以得到至少两个天线场型状态下对应的至少两个相位差包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch among the plurality of antenna pattern states; in each antenna pattern state, the electronic device passes through the The first antenna and the second antenna receive radio signals having the same angle of arrival and calculate the phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna, so as to obtain at least two phases corresponding to at least two antenna pattern states Differences include:
    在所述多个天线场型状态中的第一天线场型状态下,所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号;In a first antenna pattern state of the plurality of antenna pattern states, the electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
    所述电子设备将所述第一天线场型状态的标识及所述第一相位差输入预设的到达角度计算函数,若所述到达角度计算函数输出至少两个到达角度,所述电子设备将所述天线单元从所述第一天线场型状态切换至所述多个天线场型状态中的第二天线场型状态,并通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下接收所述无线电信号;The electronic device inputs the identification of the first antenna pattern state and the first phase difference into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function, and if the angle-of-arrival calculation function outputs at least two angles of arrival, the electronic device will The antenna unit is switched from the first antenna pattern state to the second antenna pattern state among the plurality of antenna pattern states, and the second antenna pattern state is switched between the first antenna and the second antenna receiving the radio signal in an antenna pattern state;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第二天线场型状态下的第二相位差。The electronic device calculates a second phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the second antenna pattern state.
  9. 根据权利要求2或6或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备依据所述至少两个相位差确定所述无线电信号的到达角度包括:The method according to claim 2 or 6 or 8, wherein the electronic device determining the angle of arrival of the radio signal according to the at least two phase differences comprises:
    将所述至少两个相位差及对应的天线场型状态输入预设的到达角度计算函数,以得到所 述无线电信号的到达角度。Inputting the at least two phase differences and the corresponding antenna pattern state into a preset angle-of-arrival calculation function to obtain the angle-of-arrival of the radio signal.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first antenna has at least two first feed points, and the electronic device controlling the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
    所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点,所述第二天线包括至少两个第二馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first antenna has at least two first feed points, the second antenna includes at least two second feed points, and the electronic device controls the antenna unit Switching among the at least two antenna pattern states includes:
    所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换和所述第二天线与对应馈源之间的至少两个第二馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source and at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source Switching between different feed points in the antenna unit, so as to realize the switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相对两侧或所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相邻两侧。The method according to claim 10, wherein two of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna or in the at least two first feed points The two feed points are respectively located on adjacent two sides of the first antenna.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 11, characterized in that,
    所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相对两侧,所述至少两个第二馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第二天线的相对两侧,或所述至少两个第一馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第一天线的相邻两侧,所述至少两个第二馈点中的两个馈点分别位于所述第二天线的相邻两侧。Two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on opposite sides of the first antenna, and two feed points of the at least two second feed points are respectively located on the sides of the second antenna opposite sides, or the two feed points of the at least two first feed points are respectively located on adjacent sides of the first antenna, and the two feed points of the at least two second feed points are respectively located Adjacent two sides of the second antenna.
  14. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述天线单元还包括第三天线,所述映射关系表还包括多个天线场型状态下的不同到达角度,以及所述无线电信号的不同到达角度对应的所述第一天线和所述第三天线的相位差。The method according to claim 2, wherein the antenna unit further includes a third antenna, and the mapping relationship table further includes different arrival angles under a plurality of antenna pattern states, and different arrival angles of the radio signals The phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna corresponding to the angle.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 14, characterized in that,
    所述电子设备通过所述第一天线和所述第二天线接收无线电信号,包括:The electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna and the second antenna, including:
    所述电子设备通过所述第一天线、所述第二天线和所述第三天线接收无线电信号;所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差,包括:The electronic device receives radio signals through the first antenna, the second antenna, and the third antenna; the electronic device calculates that the first antenna and the second antenna are in the field of the first antenna The first phase difference in the type state, including:
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第二天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第一相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a first phase difference between the first antenna and the second antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
    所述电子设备计算出所述第一天线和所述第三天线在所述第一天线场型状态下的第三相位差;calculating, by the electronic device, a third phase difference between the first antenna and the third antenna in the pattern state of the first antenna;
    所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第一到达角度集合,包括:The electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival set according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table, including:
    所述电子设备依据所述第一相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第一到达角度子集合;The electronic device determines a first angle-of-arrival subset according to the first phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
    所述电子设备依据所述第三相位差、所述第一天线场型状态和所述映射关系表确定第二到达角度子集合;The electronic device determines a second angle-of-arrival subset according to the third phase difference, the first antenna pattern state, and the mapping relationship table;
    依据所述第一到达角子集合和所述第二到达角子集合确定第一到达角集合。A first set of angles of arrival is determined according to the first subset of angles of arrival and the second subset of angles of arrival.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一天线具有至少两个第一馈点, 所述第二天线具有至少两个第二馈点,所述第三天线具有至少两个第三馈点,所述电子设备控制所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换,包括:The method according to claim 15, wherein the first antenna has at least two first feed points, the second antenna has at least two second feed points, and the third antenna has at least two The third feed point, where the electronic device controls the antenna unit to switch between the at least two antenna pattern states, includes:
    所述电子设备控制所述第一天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第一馈点中不同馈点的切换、所述第二天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第二馈点中不同馈点的切换,所述第三天线与对应馈源之间至少两个第三馈点中不同馈点的切换,以实现所述天线单元在所述至少两个天线场型状态中切换。The electronic device controls the switching of different feed points among at least two first feed points between the first antenna and the corresponding feed source, and the switching between the at least two second feed points between the second antenna and the corresponding feed source. The switching of the feed point, the switching of different feed points among at least two third feed points between the third antenna and the corresponding feed source, so as to realize the switching of the antenna unit among the at least two antenna pattern states.
  17. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:两个或大于两个天线、显示屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;所述一个或多个处理器与所述两个或大于两个天线、所述一个或多个存储器以及所述显示屏耦合,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行上述权利要求1-16中的任一项所述的信号到达角度估计方法。An electronic device, characterized in that it includes: two or more than two antennas, a display screen, one or more processors and one or more memories; the one or more processors and the two or more Two antennas, the one or more memories and the display screen are coupled, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the When the computer instruction is used, the electronic device is made to execute the method for estimating the signal angle of arrival according to any one of claims 1-16.
  18. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-16中任一项所述的信号到达角度估计方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the signal arrival angle according to any one of claims 1-16 Estimation method.
  19. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-16中任一项所述的信号到达角度估计的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method for estimating a signal angle of arrival according to any one of claims 1-16.
PCT/CN2022/128077 2021-11-12 2022-10-27 Signal angle-of-arrival estimation method and related device WO2023083017A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111369078.7 2021-11-12
CN202111369078.7A CN116125374A (en) 2021-11-12 2021-11-12 Signal arrival angle estimation method and related equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023083017A1 true WO2023083017A1 (en) 2023-05-19

Family

ID=86301449

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/128077 WO2023083017A1 (en) 2021-11-12 2022-10-27 Signal angle-of-arrival estimation method and related device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116125374A (en)
WO (1) WO2023083017A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210351494A1 (en) * 2018-07-13 2021-11-11 Apple Inc. Electronic Device Having Angle of Arrival Detection Capabilities

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120223811A1 (en) * 2011-03-03 2012-09-06 Checkpoint Systems, Inc. Multiple Antenna Localizing
KR20150103984A (en) * 2014-03-04 2015-09-14 국방과학연구소 A phase comparison direction finding apparatus and method for detecting angle of arrival ambiguity
CN110557740A (en) * 2019-08-02 2019-12-10 华为技术有限公司 Electronic equipment control method and electronic equipment
CN110718740A (en) * 2018-07-13 2020-01-21 苹果公司 Electronic device with angle-of-arrival detection capability
CN112684406A (en) * 2020-12-18 2021-04-20 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method for determining angle of arrival and related product
CN112858996A (en) * 2020-12-31 2021-05-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Terminal, arrival angle measuring method and related device

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120223811A1 (en) * 2011-03-03 2012-09-06 Checkpoint Systems, Inc. Multiple Antenna Localizing
KR20150103984A (en) * 2014-03-04 2015-09-14 국방과학연구소 A phase comparison direction finding apparatus and method for detecting angle of arrival ambiguity
CN110718740A (en) * 2018-07-13 2020-01-21 苹果公司 Electronic device with angle-of-arrival detection capability
CN110557740A (en) * 2019-08-02 2019-12-10 华为技术有限公司 Electronic equipment control method and electronic equipment
CN112684406A (en) * 2020-12-18 2021-04-20 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method for determining angle of arrival and related product
CN112858996A (en) * 2020-12-31 2021-05-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Terminal, arrival angle measuring method and related device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210351494A1 (en) * 2018-07-13 2021-11-11 Apple Inc. Electronic Device Having Angle of Arrival Detection Capabilities

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116125374A (en) 2023-05-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021098442A1 (en) Positioning interaction method and apparatus
WO2023083017A1 (en) Signal angle-of-arrival estimation method and related device
CN113676238A (en) Method for determining angle of arrival and related product
CN116070035B (en) Data processing method and electronic equipment
CN113794796B (en) Screen projection method and electronic equipment
CN112637758A (en) Equipment positioning method and related equipment thereof
WO2021143650A1 (en) Method for sharing data and electronic device
CN113438643A (en) Terminal capability reporting system, method, electronic equipment and storage medium
WO2022062902A1 (en) File transfer method and electronic device
WO2022033355A1 (en) Mail processing method and electronic device
WO2021254294A1 (en) Method for switching audio output channel, apparatus, and electronic device
WO2022095906A1 (en) Key mapping method, electronic device, and system
WO2022206643A1 (en) Method for estimating angle of arrival of signal and electronic device
CN115388845A (en) Azimuth angle determination method and related product
WO2021254510A1 (en) Method for determining screenshot area, and related apparatus
CN116847273A (en) Object searching method and system and electronic equipment
CN114489471A (en) Input and output processing method and electronic equipment
CN113671534A (en) Positioning compensation method, vehicle-mounted unit, medium and system
WO2022166550A1 (en) Data transmission method and electronic device
CN113311380B (en) Calibration method, device and storage medium
CN116437293B (en) Geofence establishment method, server and communication system
WO2023024873A1 (en) Display method, electronic device, and system
WO2023116511A1 (en) Content sharing method and terminal device
CN116794697A (en) Direct-view satellite identification method and electronic equipment
CN115248414A (en) Azimuth angle determination method and related product

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22891813

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1